Graphical User Interface
Use this manual in combination with the operating
guide displayed on the GUI screen.
GUI Menu Operation (vpage 23)
GUI Menu Map (vpage 24)
AV SURROUND RECEIVER
AVR-4308CI
Owner’s Manual
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
1
2007/05/11
16:14:07
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
nSAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
2.
3.
4.
5.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
6.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
8.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended
to alert the user to the presence of important operating
and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
7.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read
before the product is operated.
Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be
retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating
instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not
use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product
manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example,
near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement;
or near a swimming pool; and the like.
Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or
adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the
product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
use a mounting accessory recommended by the
manufacturer.
A product and cart combination should be moved
with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation
and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from
overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa,
rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided
or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of
power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type
of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power
company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized
alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).
This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature.
If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the
plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
FIGURE A
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
AS PER NATIONAL
ELECTRICAL CODE
"/5&//"
-&"%*/
8*3&
(306/%
$-".1
"/5&//"
%*4$)"3(&6/*5
/&$4&$5*0/
&-&$53*$
4&37*$&
&26*1.&/5
(306/%*/($0/%6$5034
/&$4&$5*0/
(306/%$-".14
108&34&37*$&(306/%*/(
&-&$530%&4:45&.
/&$/"5*0/"-&-&$53*$"-$0%& /&$"351"35)
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they
are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against
them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles,
and the point where they exit from the product.
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is
connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded
so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static
charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting
structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size
of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See
Figure A.
16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm,
or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it
from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the
vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or
where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside
antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral
convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product
through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out
parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind
on the product.
20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or
removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet
and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
a)When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b)If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
d)If the product does not operate normally by following the operating
instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating
instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to
restore the product to its normal operation,
e)If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and
f)When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this
indicates a need for service.
22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the
service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer
or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.
23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product,
ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the
product is in proper operating condition.
24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall or
ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
25.Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
I
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
2
2007/05/11
16:14:08
FCC Information (For US customers)
nNOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION
1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
Product Name: AV Surround Receiver
Model Number: AVR-4308CI
This product contains FCC ID: BV2- MPGBR052.
This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Denon Electronics (USA), LLC
100 Corporate Drive, Marwah, NJ 07430-2041
Tel. 201-762-6500 (Main)
• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.
• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans
• Keep the unit free from moisture, water,
l’appareil.
and dust.
• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau
et la poussière.
2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.
Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
3. CAUTION
•To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirement, separation distance of at least 20 cm must be
maintained between the antenna of this product and all persons.
•This product and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
4. NOTE
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation.
This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
• Avoid high temperatures.
Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when
installed in a rack.
• Eviter des températures élevées.
Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur
suffisante lors de l’installation sur une
étagère.
• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and
thinner come in contact with the unit.
• Unplug the power cord when not using the • Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides,
du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.
unit for long periods of time.
• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation
lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant
de longues périodes.
IC Information (For Canadian customers)
1. PRODUCT
This product contains IC 6963A-MPGBR052.
This product complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
APPAREIL
Cet appareil contiens IC 6963A- MPGBR052.
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-210 du Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement
aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être
prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
• Handle the power cord carefully.
Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.
• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec
précaution.
Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du
cordon.
* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)
• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.
• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.
• Never disassemble or modify the unit in
any way.
• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil
d’une manière ou d’une autre.
2. CAUTION
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication.
ATTENTION
Afin de réduire le risque d’interférence aux autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de façon à
ce que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne soit pas supérieure au niveau requis pour l’obtention
d’une communication satisfaisante.
II
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
3
2007/05/11
16:14:09
Contents
Getting Started
Accessories·······················································································2
Cautions on Handling······································································3
Cautions on Installation··································································3
About the Remote Control Unit·····················································3
Inserting the Batteries·····································································3
Operating Range of the Remote Control Unit·································3
Part Names and Functions······························································4
Front Panel······················································································4
Display····························································································4
Rear Panel·······················································································5
Remote Control Unit·······································································6
Connections
Preparations·····················································································7
Cables Used for Connections·························································7
Video Conversion Function······························································8
Speaker Connections······································································9
Speaker Installation·········································································9
Speaker Connections································································ 9, 10
Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors·························· 11
Connecting the Monitor································································ 12
Connecting the Playback Components······································· 12
DVD Player···················································································· 12
Record Player················································································ 13
CD Player······················································································ 13
iPod®····························································································· 13
TV/CABLE Tuner············································································ 14
Satellite Receiver·········································································· 14
Connecting the Recording Components····································· 15
Digital Video Recorder··································································· 15
Video Cassette Recorder······························································ 15
CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck······································ 16
Connections to Other Devices······················································ 16
Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector··············· 16
Video Camera / Game Console····················································· 17
Component with Multi-channel Output connectors······················ 17
External Power Amplifier······························································· 17
USB Port······················································································· 18
XM connector··············································································· 18
Antenna terminals · ······································································ 19
Network Audio··············································································20
Multi Zone·····················································································21
External Controller········································································21
Connecting the Power Cord·························································22
Once Connections are Completed···············································22
GUI Menu Operations
Example of the Display of the GUI Mark at a Title·····················23
Example of Display of Default Values··········································23
Examples of GUI Screen Displays················································23
Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)············································23
Example: Menus with Illustrations (Auto Setup)···························23
Cursor Position Display·································································23
Operations······················································································23
GUI Menu Map···············································································24
Auto Setup
Preparations···················································································25
Auto Setup·····················································································26
a Auto Setup···············································································26
Error Messages········································································27
s Option······················································································27
d Parameter Check······································································27
Manual Setup
Speaker Setup···············································································28
a Speaker Configuration······························································28
s Subwoofer Mode·····································································28
d Distance···················································································28
f Channel Level··········································································29
g Crossover Frequency·······························································29
h Surround Speaker····································································29
HDMI Setup····················································································30
a i/p Scaler··················································································30
s Resolution················································································30
d Progressive Mode····································································30
f Aspect······················································································30
g Color Space··············································································30
h RGB Range··············································································30
j Auto Lip Sync···········································································30
k Audio························································································30
l Monitor Out·············································································30
Audio Setup···················································································31
a EXT. IN Setup··········································································· 31
s 2ch Direct/Stereo····································································· 31
d Downmix Option······································································ 31
f Auto Surround Mode······························································· 31
g Manual EQ···············································································32
Network Setup···············································································32
a Network Setup···································································32, 33
s Other························································································34
d Network Information································································34
Zone Setup·····················································································34
a ZONE2·····················································································34
s ZONE3·····················································································34
Option Setup··················································································35
a Amp Assign·············································································· 35
s Volume Control········································································ 35
d Source Delete·········································································· 35
f GUI··························································································· 35
g Quick Select Name·································································· 35
h Trigger Out 1············································································36
j Trigger Out 2············································································36
k Digital Out················································································36
l Remote ID················································································36
A0 2Way Remote··········································································36
A1 Dimmer····················································································36
A2 Setup Lock···············································································36
A3 Maintenance Mode··································································36
A4 Firmware Update·····································································37
Language························································································37
Source Select
Input Source Selection·····························································37, 38
Settings Related to Playing Input Sources··································38
a Play·························································································· 38
s Auto Preset·············································································· 38
d Preset Skip··············································································· 38
f Preset Name············································································ 38
g Input Mode··············································································39
h Rename····················································································39
j Other························································································39
k Playback Mode (iPod)·······························································39
l Assign······················································································40
A0 Playback Mode·········································································40
A1 Still Picture···············································································41
A2 Antenna Aiming·······································································41
Surround Modes
Standard Playback·········································································41
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources······································41
Playing Multi-channel Sources (Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)··············41
DSP Simulation Playback·····························································42
Stereo Playback·············································································42
Direct Playback··············································································42
Playback in the Pure Direct Mode·················································42
Parameter
Audio······························································································42
a Surround Parameters·······················································42 ~ 44
s Tone·························································································44
d Room EQ·················································································44
f RESTORER···············································································44
g Night Mode··············································································45
h Audio Delay··············································································45
Picture Adjust·················································································45
a Contrast···················································································45
s Brightness················································································45
d Chroma Level···········································································45
f Hue··························································································45
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
4
2007/05/11
16:14:10
Accessories
Playback
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
qOwner’s manual....................................................................... 1
wWarranty (for North America model only)................................. 1
eService station list.................................................................... 1
rPower cord (Cord length: Approx. 5 ft /1.5 m)........................... 1
tMain remote control (RC-1068)................................................ 1
yLR6/AA batteries (for RC-1068)................................................. 2
uSub remote control (RC-1070).................................................. 1
iR03/AAA batteries (for RC-1070).............................................. 2
oFM indoor antenna................................................................... 1
Q0AM loop antenna (small, for AM broadcasts)........................... 1
Q1AM loop antenna (large, for HD Radio broadcasts).................. 1
Q2Dipole antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts)................................ 1
Q3Rod antenna for wireless LAN connection............................... 1
Q4Setup microphone (Cord length: Approx. 25 ft / 7.6 m)............. 1
o
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Troubleshooting
u
Information
t
Multi-Zone
r
Remote Control
Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations
Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function··········70 ~ 72
Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out Output····72
Multi-Zone Operations··································································73
Turning the Power On and Off······················································73
Selecting the Input Source····························································73
Adjusting the Volume····································································73
Turning off the Sound Temporarily·················································73
Thank you for purchasing this DENON product. To ensure proper
operation, please read these owner’s manual carefully before using
the product.
After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.
Setup
Remote Control Unit Operations
Main Remote Control Unit···························································61
Operating DENON Audio Components·········································61
Presetting······················································································61
Operating Preset Components·············································61 ~ 63
Setting the Remote ID··································································64
Learning Function··········································································64
System Call Function·····································································65
Punch Through Function································································65
Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit········································65
Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness·············································66
Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit······································66
Sub Remote Control Unit Operations····································67, 68
Switching Zones············································································69
Setting the Zone for Which the Sub Remote Control Unit is Used
(ZONE SELECT LOCK Mode)························································69
Setting the Remote ID··································································69
Resetting the Settings···································································69
Getting Started
Connections
Playback
Preparations···················································································47
Turning the Power On···································································47
Operations During Playback··························································47
Playing Video and Audio Equipment············································47
Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts··················································48
Basic Operation·············································································48
Presetting Radio Stations (Preset Memory)··································48
Listening to Preset Stations··························································48
Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs··································49
Basic Operation·············································································49
Checking the XM Signal Strength and Radio ID····························50
Searching Categories····································································50
Accessing XM Radio Stations Directly··········································50
Listening to HD Radio Stations····················································50
Basic Operation·············································································50
Selecting Audio Programs·····························································51
Check the HD Radio Reception Information·································51
iPod® Playback··············································································52
Basic Operation·············································································52
Listening to Music········································································52
Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the iPod··································52
Playing Network Audio or USB Memory Devices·······················53
Basic Operation·············································································54
Listening to Internet Radio····························································55
Presetting Internet Radio Stations················································55
Registering Internet Radio Stations as Your Favorites···················56
Playing Files Stored on a Computer··············································56
Playing Files Stored on USB Memory Devices·······················56, 57
Operating the AVR-4308CI Using a Browser (Web control)··········57
Other Operations and Functions
Other Operations···········································································58
Playing Super Audio CDs······························································58
Recording on an External Device (REC OUT mode)······················58
Convenient Functions···································································59
Channel Level················································································59
Fader Function··············································································59
Quick Select Function···································································59
Personal Memory Plus Function···················································60
Last Function Memory··································································60
Backup Memory············································································60
Panel Lock Mode···········································································60
Remote Lock Mode······································································60
Resetting the Microprocessor·······················································60
Getting Started
Information
Status·····························································································45
a MAIN ZONE·············································································45
s ZONE2/3/4···············································································45
Audio Input Signal·········································································46
HDMI Information··········································································46
a Signal Information····································································46
s Monitor1··················································································46
d Monitor2··················································································46
Auto Surround··············································································· 46
Quick Select··················································································· 46
Preset Station················································································ 46
Other Information································································· 74 ~ 85
Troubleshooting····································································86 ~ 89
Specifications·········································································· 89, 90
List of preset codes············································ End of this manual
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
5
2007/05/11
16:14:11
Getting Started
Cautions on Handling
About the Remote Control Unit
•Before turning the power switch on
Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are
no problems with the connection cables.
Connections
•Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is
set to the standby mode. When traveling or leaving home for long
periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power
outlet.
Setup
Playback
•About condensation
If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of
the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on
the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate
properly.
If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power
turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature
before using the unit.
In addition to the AVR-4308CI, the included main remote control unit
(RC-1068) can also be used to operate the equipment listed below.
qDENON system components
wNon-DENON system components
•By setting the preset memory (vpage 61 ~ 63)
•By using the learn function (vpage 64)
Inserting the Batteries
q Lift the clasp and remove the rear lid.
(RC-1068)
(RC-1070)
Remote Control
•Cautions on using mobile phones
Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If so, move
the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.
Multi-Zone
•Moving the unit
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet.
Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before
moving the unit.
Information
•Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the
actual unit for explanation purposes.
w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the
battery compartment.
(RC-1068)
NOTE
•Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even
when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit.
•The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.
•When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction,
following the “q” and “w” marks in the battery compartment.
•To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
•Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
•Do not use two different types of batteries.
•Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.
•Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in
flames.
•If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside
of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.
•Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in
use for long periods.
•When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and
insert them as quickly as possible.
Operating Range of the Remote Control
Unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
(RC-1070)
R03/AAA
LR6/AA
Cautions on Installation
Troubleshooting
Note:
For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined
space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.
(RC-1070)
30°
30°
e Put the rear cover back on.
or
Approx. 23 feet / 7 m
bNote
b
(RC-1068)
b
NOTE
The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not
operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight,
strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared
light.
b
Wall
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
6
2007/05/11
16:14:12
For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).
Front Panel
E0DIRECT/STEREO button····························· (42)
E1PURE DIRECT button··································· (42)
E2DSP SIMULATION button··························· (42)
E3STANDARD button······································ (41)
i
u
y
Connections
Display
o
t
Q8
Q7
Q6
Q5
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1 o
Q0
i
u
Getting Started
W6USB port······················································· (18)
W7STATUS button············································ (46)
W8INPUT MODE button··································· (39)
W9RESTORER button······································· (44)
Part Names and Functions
y
Setup
Playback
Q3
q
w
q
w e
r
E3 E2 E1 E0 W9 W8
Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 W0 W1
W2
W3
qPower operation button
(ON/STANDBY)············································ (47)
wPower indicator············································ (47)
ePower switch (hON jOFF)······················ (47)
rQUICK SELECT buttons / indicators·········· (59)
tMASTER VOLUME control knob················· (47)
yMaster volume indicator
uDisplay
The input source name, surround mode, setting
values and other information are displayed here.
rOutput signal channel indicators
tSurround speaker indicators
These light according to the settings of the
surround A and B speakers.
yMonitor output indicators
These light according to the HDMI monitor
output setting. When set to “Auto”, the indicators
light according to the connection status.
uMaster volume indicator
iAUDYSSEY MULTEQ XT indicator
This lights when the room equalizer is selected.
oRecording output source indicator
This lights when the REC OUT mode is
selected.
Q0NIGHT indicator
This lights when the night mode is selected.
Q1Multi zone indicators
These light when the power for the respective
zone is turned on.
This lights when the RESTORER mode is
selected.
Q3ADVANCED AL24 indicator
This lights when Advanced AL24 Processing is
activated (vpage 76).
Q4D.LINK indicator
This lights when playing using DENON LINK
connections.
Q5Input mode indicators
Q6HDMI indicator
This lights
connections.
when
playing
using
HDMI
Q7Decoder indicators
These light when the respective decoders are
operating.
Troubleshooting
Q4
W7 W6 W5 W4
iRemote control sensor·································· (3)
oSOURCE SELECT knob······························· (37)
Q0SOURCE button··········································· (37)
Q1TUNING PRESET button····························· (48)
Q2ZONE 2/3/4 / REC SELECT button······· (58, 73)
Q3VIDEO SELECT button································ (39)
Q4Headphones jack (PHONES)······················· (47)
Q5ZONE2 ON/OFF button······························· (73)
Q6ZONE3 ON/OFF button······························· (73)
Q7ZONE4 ON/OFF button······························· (73)
Q8MENU button··············································· (23)
Q9Cursor buttons (uio p)··························· (23)
W0CH SEL / ENTER button························ (23, 59)
W1RETURN button··········································· (23)
W2V.AUX INPUT connectors···························· (17)
W3SETUP MIC jack··········································· (25)
W4ROOM EQ button········································· (44)
W5DIMMER button··········································· (36)
These light when digital signals are input.
eInformation display
Q2RESTORER indicator
Information
GWith the door openH
r t
Multi-Zone
qInput signal indicators
wInput signal channel indicators
e
Remote Control
Q0 Q1 Q2
Q8Tuner reception mode indicators
These light according to the reception conditions
when the input source is set to “TUNER” or
“HD Radio”.
•AUTO
These light when in the auto tuning mode.
•STEREO
In the FM mode, these light when receiving
analog stereo broadcasts.
•TUNED
Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
7
2007/05/11
16:14:13
Getting Started
Rear Panel
Q6
Q7
Q5
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1
Q0
o
i
Connections
Setup
Playback
W2
Remote Control
Q9
W0
W1
W0
Q9
Q8
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
q
w
e
r
qRS-232C connector······································ (21)
wTRIGGER OUT jacks···································· (21)
eFM/AM antenna terminals
t
iHD Radio antenna terminals
(DTU ANTENNA)·········································· (19)
oDigital audio connectors
(TUNER ANTENNA)····································· (19)
(OPTICAL / COAXIAL)··························· (12, 14)
rDOCK CONTROL jack·································· (13)
tSpeaker terminals (SPEAKERS)··················· (9)
yAC OUTLETS················································ (22)
uAC inlet (AC IN)············································ (22)
Q0WLAN ANTENNA terminal·························· (20)
Q1ETHERNET connector·································· (20)
Q2USB port······················································· (18)
Q3XM connector (SAT TU)······························· (18)
Q4DENON LINK connector······························ (16)
y
u
Q5COMPONENT VIDEO connectors··············· (12)
Q6HDMI connectors··········································(11)
Q7VIDEO / S-VIDEO connectors····················· (12)
Q8REMOTE CONTROL jacks··························· (21)
Q9Analog audio connectors (AUDIO)············· (12)
W0PRE OUT connectors······························ (17, 21)
W1EXT. IN connectors······································ (17)
W2SIGNAL GND terminal································ (13)
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
8
2007/05/11
16:14:15
nMain remote control unit (RC-1068)
Q5
r
Q8
Q9
W0
W1
W2
Q2Monitor select (M. SEL) /
W3
W4
Q2
W5
W6
Q8RESTORER button (RSTR)··························· (44)
Q9Night button (NGT)····································· (45)
W0Test tone button (TEST)······························ (29)
W1Surround speaker select button (SPKR)···· (29)
W2POWER buttons··········································· (47)
W3Channel select (CH SEL) /
Q4
W7
(Z3 / Z4)························································ (73)
r
Q4
t
Q5
y
Q6
u
(ZONE ON / ZONE OFF)······························ (73)
(VOLUME)··················································· (69)
Q5Muting button (MUTE)···························(47, 73)
Q6ENTER button·············································· (23)
Q7RETURN button··········································· (23)
Q8System buttons····································· (48, 67)
Q9ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES
(DIRECT PLAY) button································ (67)
W0USB (DIRECT PLAY) button························ (67)
NOTE
i
Q7
The AUX-1, AUX-2, AUX-3, DVR-2 and OPTION
buttons cannot be used.
Q8
ENTER button········································ (23, 59)
W4Return button (RTN)···································· (23)
W5Master volume control buttons (VOL)······· (47)
W6Muting button (MUTE)···························(47, 73)
W7Main remote control unit setup button
Q4Master volume control buttons
o
Troubleshooting
Q3
HOME button········································· (30, 61)
Q3Channel buttons (CH)·································· (47)
Q4Input source select / Number buttons····(37, 48)
Q5Remote control signal transmitter··············· (3)
Q6Device select indicators (DEV1 / DEV2)···· (61)
Q7ZONE3 / ZONE4 select indicators
Q1
e
Information
Q0
(PARA / SRCH)································· (42, 50, 52)
Q3
w
Multi-Zone
o
Q2
Remote Control
t
y
u
i
q
qZONE indicators·········································· (69)
wAdvanced setup button······························· (69)
eInput source select buttons························ (37)
rCHANNEL buttons······································· (47)
tSHIFT button················································ (47)
yMENU button··············································· (23)
uCursor buttons (uio p)·························· (23)
iSEARCH button····································· (50, 52)
oREPEAT button············································· (52)
Q0RANDOM button········································· (52)
Q1Remote control signal transmitter··············· (3)
Q2ZONE SELECT button·································· (69)
Q3Zone power on/off buttons
Playback
Q6
Q7
e
Q1
Setup
w
qSignal transmission indicator···················· (61)
wMode select buttons··································· (61)
eQuick select / System call buttons······ (59, 65)
rSurround mode buttons······················· (41, 42)
tSystem buttons····································· (62, 63)
yAudio delay button (A. DL)························· (45)
uTuner system buttons································· (48)
iInput mode button (INPUT)························ (39)
oMENU button··············································· (23)
Q0Cursor buttons (uio p)·························· (23)
Q1Parameter / Search button
Connections
q
nSub remote control unit (RC-1070)
Getting Started
Remote Control Unit
Q9
Q0
(RC SETUP)·················································· (61)
The time for which the backlight stays on can
be changed (vpage 65 “Setting the Time the
Backlight Stays Lit”).
NOTE
The ZONE2 mode QUICK SELECT (1 ~ 3), A. DL,
RSTR, NGT, INPUT, SPKR, TEST and surround
mode buttons cannot be used.
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
9
2007/05/11
16:14:17
Getting Started
Preparations
Connections
Connections
Setup
Connections for all compatible audio and video signal formats are
described in these operating instructions. Please select the types
of connections suited for the equipment you are connecting.
With some types of connections, certain settings must be made
on the AVR-4308CI. For details, refer to the instructions for the
respective connection items below.
Cables Used for Connections
Select the cables according to the equipment being connected.
Audio cables
Coaxial digital connections
Component video connections
(Green)
(Orange)
Playback
Optical digital connections
(PB/CB)
(Red)
(PR/CR)
Component video cable
S-Video connections
Optical cable
Remote Control
Analog connections (stereo)
(White)
L
L
(Red)
R
R
(Y)
(Blue)
Coaxial digital (75 Ω/ohms pin-plug) cable
NOTE
•Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been
completed.
•When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of
the other components.
•Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left,
right with right).
•Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing
so can result in humming or noise.
Video cables
Multi-Zone
Stereo pin-plug cable
S-Video cable
Video connections
(Yellow)
75 Ω/ohms pin-plug video cable
Analog connections (monaural, for subwoofer)
Information
(Black)
Pin-plug cable
Audio and video cables
HDMI connections
DENON LINK connections
Troubleshooting
19-pin HDMI cable
DENON LINK cable
Signal direction
Speaker connections
Audio signal:
Video signal:
Output
Speaker cables
Input
Output
Input
Network connections (wired LAN)
Ethernet cable
Input
Output Input
Output
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
10
2007/05/11
16:14:18
GFlow of video signals inside the AVR-4308CIH
Component video
connectors
S-Video connector
S-Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
Video inputs
Video outputs
Monitor
Information
Component video
connectors
Multi-Zone
HDMI connector
Remote Control
HDMI connector
: When 480i/576i signals are input in the main zone
GFlow of video signals for ZONE2H
Troubleshooting
ZONE2
High picture
quality playback
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Playback
High picture
quality playback
NOTE
•HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.
•1080p component input video signals cannot be output to anything other than component video
connectors.
•480p/576p, 1080i and 720p component video input signals cannot be converted into S-Video or Video
format.
•When using the component video output connectors for connection to the ZONE2 monitor, the ZONE2’s
on-screen display is not displayed.
Setup
Main zone
•When not using this function, connect a monitor output with the same type of connector as the video
input connector.
•The resolution of the HDMI input-compatible monitor connected to the AVR-4308CI can be checked at
GUI menu “Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor1” or “Monitor2” (vpage 46).
Connections
•This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to the AVR-4308CI into the
format used to output the video signals from the AVR-4308CI to a monitor.
•The AVR-4308CI’s video input/output circuitry is compatible with the following four types of video
signals:
Digital video signals: HDMI
Analog video signals: Component video, S-Video and Video
Getting Started
Video Conversion Function
ZONE2
monitor
S-Video connector
Video connector
Video connector
Video inputs
Video outputs
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
11
2007/05/11
16:14:18
Getting Started
Speaker Connections
Speaker Connections
Example: 7.1-channels (Surround A+B) and ZONE2 use
Speaker Installation
Front speakers
Surround back
speakers
Center speaker
Connections
The illustration below shows a basic example of installation of the amplifier combined with 8 speakers and
a monitor.
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Surround back speakers
(L)
Setup
w
(L)
(R)
q
w
q
w
w
q
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
with built-in
amplifier
(R)
qw
q
*/
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Front speakers
Place the front speakers to the
sides of the monitor or screen and
as flush with the screen surface as
possible.
Surround speakers
Information
The table below shows a typical speaker configuration for the AVR-4308CI.
Troubleshooting
Front
7.1-channels
(Surround A+B)
7.1-channels
6.1-channels
5.1-channels
3.1-channels
2.1-channels
2-channels
L
R
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Surround A Surround B
Center
Surround back
1
L
R
only
Subwoofer
L
R
L
R
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
–
S
S
S
S
S
–
–
S
S
S
–
–
–
S
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
S
–
–
–
–
–
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
S
–
–
–
–
S
S
S
S
S
–
bL : Left
R : Right
(L)
w
(R)
qw
(L)
q
Surround speakers
A
w
(R)
qw
(L)
q
Surround speakers
B
w
(R)
qw
q
ZONE2 speakers
ZONE2
When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (SBL).
NOTE
By default, the AVR-4308CI’s “Amp Assign” setting is set to “ZONE2”, so sound is not output simply by
connecting a speaker to the surround back terminal. To use as the surround back speaker for the main zone,
either turn the ZONE2 power off or change the “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 70, 71).
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
12
2007/05/11
16:14:21
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and –
(black) polarities on the speakers being connected to the AVR-4308CI,
and be sure to interconnect the channels and polarities correctly.
Peel off about 0.03 ft/10 mm of sheathing
Turn
the
speaker
terminal
counterclockwise to loosen it.
Playback
Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to
Setup
the hilt into the speaker terminal.
Remote Control
2
3
4
from the tip of the speaker cable, then
either twist the core wire tightly or
terminate it.
If speakers with an impedance lower than specified (for example
4 Ω/ohms speakers) are used for an extended period of time with
the volume turned up high, the temperature may rise, activating the
protection circuit.
When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is shut
off and the power indicator flashes red. If this happens, unplug
the power cord, then check the speaker cable and input cable
connections. If the set is extremely hot, wait for it to cool off and
improve ventilation around it. Once this is done, plug the power cord
back in and turn the set's power back on.
If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no
problems in the ventilation around the set nor in the connections,
the set may be damaged. Turn the power off, then contact a DENON
service center.
Connections
1
Protection circuit
Getting Started
Connecting the Speaker Cables
Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to
tighten it.
When using a banana plug
Multi-Zone
Tighten the speaker terminal firmly before
inserting the banana plug.
Information
NOTE
Troubleshooting
•Use speakers with an impedance of 6 to 16 Ω/ohms. When using
surround A and B speakers simultaneously, use speakers with an
impedance of 8 to 16 Ω/ohms.
•Connect the speaker cables in such a way that they do not stick out
of the speaker terminals. The protection circuit may be activated if
the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and – sides touch each
other (v “Protection circuit”).
•Never touch the speaker terminals while the power supply is
connected. Doing so could result in electric shock.
10
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
13
2007/05/11
16:14:22
Getting Started
Connecting Equipment with HDMI connectors
NOTE
With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
Connections
DVD player
Monitor
)%.*
065
)%.*
*/
bThe AVR-4308CI is equipped for HDMI version 1.3a.
This version is compatible with other versions, allowing
connection to all components equipped with an HDMI
connector.
bThe AVR-4308CI is compatible with 30- and 36-bit Deep
Color.
Setup
Compatible
audio format
Details
Discs
(examples)
Playback
2-channel linear
PCM
2ch 32-192 kHz
16/20/24 bits
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio
Multi-channel
linear PCM
8ch 32-192 kHz
16/20/24 bits
DVD-Audio
Remote Control
Dolby Digital, DTS Bitstream
DSD
2/5.1ch
2.8224 MHz
1 bit
Multi-Zone
Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD,
Bitstream
DTS-HD
•Use a CPPM-compatible DVD player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright-protected by CPPM.
•The AVR-4308CI cannot be controlled from another device via the HDMI cable.
•The audio signals output from the HDMI connector (sampling frequency, bit rate, etc.) may be restricted
by the connected device.
•Video signals are not output properly when using devices that are not HDCP-compatible.
•Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case,
switch the DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.
•If the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” setting (vpage 30) is set to “Amp”, the
sound may be interrupted when the monitor’s power is turned off.
•Use a cable on which the HDMI logo is indicated (a certified HDMI product) for connection to the HDMI
connector. Normal playback may not be possible when using a cable other than one on which the HDMI
logo is indicated (a non-HDMI-certified product).
•If the monitor or DVD player does not support deep color, deep color signal transfer is not possible.
•If the monitor or DVD player does not support xvYCC, xvYCC signal transfer is not possible.
•If the monitor does not support “Auto Lipsync Correction” function, this function will not work.
DVD-Video
SACD
HD DVD,
Blu-ray Disc
•When the AVR-4308CI and DVD player are connected using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-4308CI
and monitor using an HDMI cable.
•If the connected monitor or DVD player only has a DVI-D connector, use an HDMI/DVI converter cable.
When using a DVI cable, no audio signals are transmitted.
•Use a Deep Color compatible cable for connection to Deep Color compatible devices.
When connecting with an HDMI/DVI converter cable (adapter)
Copyright protection system (HDCP)
Information
In order to play the digital video and audio signals of a DVDVideo or DVD-Audio disc using HDMI/DVI connections, both
the connected DVD player and monitor must be equipped
for a copyright protection system called “HDCP” (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection).
HDCP is a copy protection technology consisting of data
encoding and mutual identification of the devices.
The AVR-4308CI is HDCP-compatible. For details on the
DVD player or monitor you are using, refer to its operating
instructions.
•HDMI video signals are theoretically compatible with the DVI format.
When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with a DVI-D connector, connection is possible using an
HDMI/DVI converter cable, but depending on the combination of components in some cases the video
signals will not be output.
•When connecting using an HDMI/DVI converter adapter, the video signals may not be output properly
due to poor connections with the connected cable, etc.
Troubleshooting
•By default, the HDMI audio signals are output from the speakers connected to the AVR-4308CI.
•To output the sound from the TV, make the settings at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “HDMI Setup”
– “Audio” – “TV” (vpage 30).
11
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
14
2007/05/11
16:14:23
Connecting the Playback Components
•Connect the cables to be used (vpage 8 “Video Conversion Function”).
•With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
•To output the audio signals to the monitor with HDMI connections, set GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “HDMI Setup” – “Audio” to “TV” (vpage 30).
7*%&0
)%.*
*/
7*%&0
*/
47*%&0
*/
$0.10/&/57*%&0
*/
:
1# 13
DVD Player
Connections
Monitor
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect
correctly.
•Connect the cables to be used.
•With HDMI connections, the video and audio signals can be transferred with a single cable.
DVD player
7*%&0
065
47*%&0
065
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
"6%*0
"6%*0
065
3
L
R
Remote Control
R
$0"9*"065
Playback
L
Setup
7*%&0
)%.*
*/
Getting Started
Connecting the Monitor
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
NOTE
•The component video connectors may be indicated differently on your monitor. For details, see the
monitor’s operating instructions.
•No audio signals are output from the HDMI monitor output connector. To play the sound by monitor, make
analog or digital audio output connections to monitor’s audio input connectors.
•The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.
Video-converted HDMI signals are not included in the audio signals.
•Connect an HDP (High-Definition Player) in the same way.
•When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “DVD” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 40).
12
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
15
2007/05/11
16:14:26
Getting Started
Record Player
CD Player
Turntable (MM cartridge)
iPod®
Connect the cables to be used.
CD player
"6%*0
$0"9*"065
Connections
"6%*0
065
3
Use a DENON Control Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately) to
connect the iPod to the AVR-4308CI. For instructions on the Control
Dock for iPod settings, refer to the Control Dock for iPod’s operating
instructions.
Example :
iPod
L
Setup
"6%*0
065
R
(/%
or
L
"4%3
R
Playback
L
R
Remote Control
R
L
R
L
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
•When connecting a record player with an MC cartridge, use a
commercially available MC head amplifier or a step-up transformer.
•Induction humming (a booming sound) may be produced from the
speakers if the volume is raised with no record player connected.
•With some record players, noise may be generated when the ground
wire is connected. If so, disconnect the ground wire.
When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the
settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “CD” – “Assign” – “Digital”
(vpage 40).
NOTE
The AVR-4308CI’s SIGNAL GND terminal is meant to reduce noise
when a record player is connected. This is not a safety ground
terminal.
•With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR
(iPod) connector.
•To assign the iPod to a connector other than VCR (iPod), make the
settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source to which iPod
dock assigned)” – “Assign” – “iPod dock” (vpage 40).
13
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
16
2007/05/11
16:14:29
Satellite Receiver
Connect the cables to be used.
Connect the cables to be used.
TV tuner
DBS / BS tuner
7*%&0
47*%&0
065
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
"6%*0
"6%*0
065
3
$0"9*"065
7*%&0
7*%&0
065
47*%&0
065
$0.10/&/57*%&0
065
:
1# 13
"6%*0
"6%*0
065
3
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
Setup
L
015*$"065
Connections
7*%&0
065
Getting Started
TV/CABLE Tuner
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
•When using a coaxial digital cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 40).
•When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “SAT” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 40).
Troubleshooting
When using an optical cable for the digital audio connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “TV/CBL” – “Assign” – “Digital” (vpage 40).
14
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
17
2007/05/11
16:14:33
Getting Started
Connecting the Recording Components
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect
correctly.
Video Cassette Recorder
Connect the cables to be used.
Video cassette recorder
7*%&0
Connections
Digital Video Recorder
"6%*0
47*%&0
*/
065
7*%&0
065
*/
"6%*0
*/
-
Connect the cables to be used.
3
015*$"065
3
065
*/
Digital video recorder
7*%&0
"6%*0
47*%&0
*/
065
Setup
7*%&0
065
*/
"6%*0
*/
-
3
015*$"065
3
065
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
*/
Playback
or
Remote Control
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
or
or
or
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
•Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals.
•When recording to a digital video recorder, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback
source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-4308CI DVR OUT connector.
Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : DVR OUT → S-Video cable
TV IN → Video cable : DVR OUT → Video cable
•When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “DVR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 40).
•When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment
be the same type that is connected to the AVR-4308CI VCR OUT connector.
Example: TV IN → S-Video cable : VCR OUT → S-Video cable
TV IN → Video cable : VCR OUT → Video cable
•When using a component video cable for the video connection, make the settings at GUI menu “Source
Select” – “VCR” – “Assign” – “Component” (vpage 40).
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308CI’s OPTICAL3 output connector
to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308CI’s OPTICAL2 output connector
to any input connector other than OPTICAL2.
15
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
18
2007/05/11
16:14:36
Make analog connections if you wish to record analog audio signals, or digital connections if you wish to
record digital audio signals, depending on the types of connectors on the components being used.
CD recorder /
MD recorder / Tape deck
Multi-channel playback is possible with DVD-Audio discs, Super Audio CDs, etc.
015*$"*/
-
065
Connections
"6%*0
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and the inputs and outputs, and be sure to interconnect
correctly.
Components Equipped with a DENON LINK connector
"6%*0
065
3
Connections to Other Devices
*/
3
DVD player
7*%&0
L
R
L
R
L
R
Playback
R
Setup
%&/0/-*/,
L
Getting Started
CD Recorder / MD Recorder / Tape Deck
or
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
NOTE
Do not connect the output of the component connected to the AVR-4308CI’s OPTICAL3 output connector
to any input connector other than OPTICAL3.
To use with DENON LINK connections, make the settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “Assign” –
“Digital” – “DENON LINK” (vpage 40).
16
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
19
2007/05/11
16:14:39
Getting Started
Video Camera / Game Console
Video camera / Game console
7*%&0
47*%&0
065
"6%*0
7*%&0
065
Connections
"6%*0
065
3
015*$"065
Component with Multi-channel Output
connectors
DVD player /
Super Audio CD player / External decoder
'30/5
-
R
L
R
Setup
L
L
Playback
L
3
R
R
$&/5&3
Power amplifier
"6%*0
46#
800'&3
'30/5
-
"6%*0
46#
800'&3
External Power Amplifier
463306/%
-
L
L
3
R
R
3
$&/5&3
463306/%
-
3
463306/%
#"$,
-
3
463306/%
#"$,
-
L
L
3
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
R
R
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left
channel (SBL).
•To play the analog input signals input to the EXT. IN connectors,
press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or INPUT button
on the main remote control unit and select “EXT. IN” or make the
settings at GUI menu “Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Input
Mode” – “Input Mode” – “EXT. IN” (vpage 39).
•The video signal can be connected in the same way as a DVD player
(vpage 12).
•To play copyright-protected discs, connect the AVR-4308CI’s EXT.
IN connector with the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output
connector.
17
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
20
2007/05/11
16:14:42
XM connector
nFront panel
nRear panel
USB memory device
USB memory device
Connections
Setup
Playback
•The AVR-4308CI is an XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM®
Satellite Radio by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
(includes home antenna, sold separately) and subscribing to the XM
service.
•Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into the XM connector on
the rear panel.
•Position the Home Dock antenna near a south-facing window to
receive the best signal.
For details, see “Listening to XM Satellite Radio Programs” (vpage
49, 50).
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of
the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
Getting Started
USB Port
Remote Control
XM
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
•In the initial status, USB memory devices can be used by connecting
them to the USB port on the front panel.
•To change the port to be used, see “USB Select” on page 40.
•For instructions on playing the files on a USB memory device, see
page 56, 57.
NOTE
•Set to the USB port you want to use.
•The AVR-4308CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the
front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB
memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time.
Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/
USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.
NOTE
Keep the power cord unplugged until the XM Mini-Tuner and Home
Dock connection have been completed.
•The XM name and related logo are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
•XM Ready is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. All
rights reserved.
18
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
21
2007/05/11
16:14:44
Getting Started
HD Radio
Antenna terminals
HD Radio is a service that is only available within the United States.
An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.
AM/FM
Connections
Direction of broadcasting station
Direction of broadcasting station
AM loop antenna
(small, supplied)
FM antenna
AM loop antenna
(large, for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied)
•To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 feet/
1 m away from the antenna connected to the
AVR-4308CI’s other AM tuner terminal.
FM antenna
Setup
Playback
75 Ω/ohms
Coaxial cable
75 Ω/ohms
Coaxial cable
Remote Control
(Black) (White)
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
Multi-Zone
FM indoor antenna
(dipole, for HD Radio
broadcasting, supplied)
Information
Ground
Troubleshooting
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC
which provides guidelines for proper grounding
and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground
shall be connected to the grounding system of
the building, as close to the point of cable entry
as practical.
AM outdoor antenna
AM loop antenna assembly
Ground
Connect to the AM
antenna terminals.
Connection of AM antennas
1.Push the
lever.
Remove the vinyl tie and take
out the connection line.
a.With the antenna on top of
any stable surface.
Mount
AM outdoor antenna
2.Insert the
conductor.
3.Return the
lever.
Bend in the reverse direction.
b.With the antenna attached
to a wall.
Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.
NOTE
•Do
not
connect
two
FM
antennas
simultaneously.
•Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not
disconnect the AM loop antenna.
•Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do
not touch metal parts of the panel.
19
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
22
2007/05/11
16:14:47
nBroadband Internet connection
[Wired LAN]
Computer
Modem
A broadband line connection to the Internet is required in order
to use the AVR-4308CI’s Internet radio function and firmware
update.
This is a device that is connected to the broadband line to
communicate with the Internet. Some are integrated with the
router.
To LAN port
LAN port/Ethernet
connector
nEthernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
Modem
Computer
To WAN side
Rod antenna
(supplied)
Router with access point
Turn clockwise.
A computer with the following specifications is required to use a
music server:
•OS
Windows® XP Service Pack2, Windows Vista
•Software (Prepare one of the following.)
· .NET Framework 1.1 and Windows Media Connect (Windows XP)
· Windows Media Player ver.11
· DLNA-compatible server software
•Internet browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later
•LAN port
•300 MB or more free disk space
Troubleshooting
Internet
nComputer
Information
[Wireless LAN]
Multi-Zone
Use for wired LAN.
•The AVR-4308CI does not come with an Ethernet cable.
•Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.
We recommend using a normal type cable.
•If the sound is broken in an environment in which there is much
power supply noise from electric products or in a noisy network
environment, use a shielded type Ethernet cable.
•If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network
settings are made manually, make the settings at GUI menu
“Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 32, 33).
•With the AVR-4308CI, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP
functions to make the network settings automatically.
•When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the AVR-4308CI
sets the IP address, etc., automatically.
When using the AVR-4308CI connected to a network with no
DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” (vpage 32, 33).
•The AVR-4308CI is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible
router is required if you have a contract for a line of the type with
which the PPPoE is set.
•Depending on the ISP with which you have your contract, it may
be necessary to make proxy server settings to use the Internet
radio function. If you made proxy server settings on the computer
to connect to the Internet, make the proxy server settings on the
AVR-4308CI in the same way.
Remote Control
Router
nOthers
Playback
To LAN port
•When using the AVR-4308CI, we recommend you use a router
equipped with the following functions:
· Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
· Built-in 100 BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching
hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
•When using with a wireless LAN, prepare a broadband router with
built-in access point.
Setup
nRouter
To WAN side
NOTE
•A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.
No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband
connection to the Internet.
•The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an
ISP or a computer shop for details.
•Depending on the server, video files may be displayed, but they
cannot be played on the AVR-4308CI.
Connections
nModem
Internet
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.
Getting Started
Required system
Network Audio
bFree disk space is required to store music and video files. The
following sizes are approximate.
Format
MP3 / WMA
MPEG-4 AAC
WAV (LPCM)
FLAC
Bit rate
128 kbps
192 kbps
256 kbps
392 kbps
1400 kbps
1080 kbps
Per minute
Approx. 1 MB
Approx. 1.5 MB
Approx. 2 MB
Approx. 3 MB
Approx. 10 MB
Approx. 7.7 MB
Per hour
Approx. 60 MB
Approx. 90 MB
Approx. 120 MB
Approx. 180 MB
Approx. 600 MB
Approx. 464 MB
20
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
23
2007/05/11
16:14:48
Getting Started
Multi Zone
External Controller
ZONE2 or ZONE3 Pre-out Connections
Connections
Setup
•If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 or ZONE3 pre-out
(variable or fixed level) connectors can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2 or ZONE3
the same time (vpage 70 ~ 74).
•When using a component video cable to connect the AVR-4308CI and input device, connect the ZONE2
monitor output to the component video connectors. When using an S-Video cable or a video cable, please
connect the cable to the standard video connectors.
•The ZONE2 video out is only for ZONE2.
Playback
Monitor (ZONE2)
Power amplifier
(ZONE2 or ZONE3)
7*%&0
"6%*0
7*%&0
*/
$0.10/&/57*%&0
*/
:
1# 13
"6%*0
*/
3
Remote Control
L
R
L
R
RS-232C connector
This connector is used for an external controller.
b If you wish to control the AVR-4308CI from
an external controller using the RS-232C
connector, perform the operation below
beforehand.
q Turn the AVR-4308CI’s power.
w Turn off the AVR-4308CI’s power from the
external controller.
e Check that the AVR-4308CI is in the standby
mode.
Multi-Zone
Information
•When using in combination with an RF Remote Controller (RC-7000CI, sold separately) or RF Remote
Receiver (RC-7001RCI, sold separately) two-way communication with an RF Remote Controller is
possible.
The AVR-4308CI’s status information as well as iPod and Internet audio music files or video files can be
browsed watching the RF Remote Controller’s display. For details, refer to the operating instructions of
the respective devices.
•When used in combination with an RF Remote Controller or RF Remote Receiver, make the settings at
GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “2Way Remote” – “Used” (vpage 36).
Trigger output jacks
Troubleshooting
"69
065
Infrared
retransmitter
Input
Output
Infrared
sensor
Extension jack for future use.
NOTE
The power of an external device equipped with
a trigger input jack can be turned on and off in
association with operations on the AVR-4308CI.
For details, see GUI menu “Manual Setup” –
“Option Setup” – “Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out
2” (vpage 36).
•Output level: 150 mA/12 V
Check the trigger input conditions of the
connected device.
•If the trigger input level of the connected device
is higher than 150 mA/12 V and depending on
the short-circuiting conditions, the AVR-4308CI’s
protection circuit may be activated, in which case
“TRIGGER PROTECT” appears on the display. If
this happens, turn off the AVR-4308CI’s power
and disconnect the connected device.
•For the audio output, use high quality pin-plug cords so that no induction humming or noise is produced.
•For instructions on installing and operating separately sold devices, refer to the respective devices’
operating instructions.
•To conduct multi-zone playback, see “Amp Assign / Multi-Zone Connections and Operations” (vpage 70 ~ 74).
21
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
24
2007/05/11
16:14:51
Getting Started
Connecting the Power Cord
Wait until all connections have been completed before connecting the power cord.
Connections
Power cord
(included)
To household
power outlet
(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)
Setup
Playback
Connection to the AC outlets
Remote Control
•These outlets supply power to external audio
devices.
•The power supplied from these outlets turns on
and off together with the set’s power switch.
•Audio equipment with a total power consumption
of 120 W (1 A) can be connected.
NOTE
Multi-Zone
•Insert the AC plugs securely. Incomplete connections could cause noise.
•Only use the AC outlets to plug in audio devices. Do not use them as power supplies for hairdryers or
anything other than audio equipment.
Information
Once Connections are Completed
Troubleshooting
Turning the Power On (vpage 47)
22
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
25
2007/05/11
16:14:53
Getting Started
Examples of GUI Screen Displays
GUI Menu Operations
Connections
With the AVR-4308CI, settings and operations for most functions can
be performed by operating while looking at the GUI menus displayed
on the monitor screen.
Some typical examples are described below.
Example: Browse Menu (Top Menu)
n Icon
Switch the selected item
Setup
Selected item
name
The GUI cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component
1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g.VGA) are input.
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Auto Setup
Guidance text for item at
cursor position
Information
Troubleshooting
This is the GUI icon for this setting
item or for the menu series to which
this item belongs.
Example of Display of Default
Values
In lists of selectable items or adjustable ranges, the item
surrounded by a border is the default value.
[Selectable items]
7.1 (B)
7.1
5.1
Selected item
Switch the selected item
n List
Example: Menus with Illustrations
(Auto Setup)
Operation guidance text
Optimize settings for speakers in use.
The appropriate settings for the speakers
you are using will be performed
automatically.
Operate as instructed on the GUI.
Switch to the next item
List of subsequent items
Example of the Display of the GUI
Mark at a Title
Items for which this mark is indicated at the title can be
operated from the GUI.
We recommend performing such operations from the
GUI.
Cursor Position Display
Operation step indicators
Auto Setup
Step1 Speaker Detection
Please place the microphone at ear
height at main listening position.
Start
Config
Assign
Input Mode
Rename
Other
Switch to the next item
b Switch the selected item using
ui.
1 2 3 4 5
Illustration
Operations
The same operation is possible on the main unit
or remote control unit.
7.1(B)
1
Press the MENU button.
Amp Assign
RETURN Cancel
Enter
Start Auto Setup and output test tone
Guidance text for item at cursor
position
Selected item
Operation
button guidance
The GUI menu is displayed.
b To operate from the main remote control unit, be sure to set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode.
2
Press the u
3
4
Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.
i p button to select the menu to be set
or operated.
b To return to the previous item, press the o or RETURN button.
Press the MENU button to finish.
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
26
2007/05/11
16:14:56
Information
(vpage 45, 46)
Source Select (vpage 37 ~ 41)
n PHONO
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
(vpage 42 ~ 45)
Surround Mode
(vpage 41, 42)
n HD Radio
• Play
• Auto Preset
• Preset Skip
• Preset Name
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
Auto Setup (vpage 25 ~ 27)
n Auto Setup
• STEP1: Speaker Detect
• STEP2: Measurements
• STEP3: Calculation
• STEP4: Check
• STEP5: Store
n Option
• Room EQ
• Direct Mode
• Mic Select
n Parameter
• Speaker Configuration Check
• Distance Check
• Channel Level Check
• Crossover Check
• EQ Check
• Restore
Manual Setup (vpage 28 ~ 37)
n Option Setup (vpage 35 ~ 37)
• Amp Assign
• Volume Control
· Volume Limit
· Power On Level
· Mute Level
• Source Delete
• GUI
· Screensaver
· Wall Paper
· Format
· Text
· Master Volume
· NET/USB
· iPod
· Tuner
• Quick Select Name
• Trigger Out 1
• Trigger Out 2
• Digital Out
• Remote ID
• 2Way Remote
• Dimmer
• Setup Lock
• Maintenance Mode
• Firmware Update
n Language (vpage 37)
Troubleshooting
n Network Setup (vpage 32 ~ 34)
• Network Setup
• Other
· Power Saving
· Character
· PC Language
• Network Information
n Zone Setup (vpage 34)
• ZONE2
· Bass
· Treble
· HPF
· Lch Level
· Rch Level
· Channel
· Volume Level
· Volume Limit
· Power On Level
· Mute Level
• ZONE3
· Bass
· Treble
· HPF
· Lch Level
· Rch Level
· Channel
· Volume Level
· Volume Limit
· Power On Level
· Mute Level
Information
n Speaker Setup (vpage 28 ~30)
• Speaker Configuration
• Subwoofer Mode
• Distance
• Channel Level
• Crossover Frequency
• Surround Speaker
n HDMI Setup (vpage 30)
• i/p Scaler
• Resolution
• Progressive Mode
• Aspect
• Color Space
• RGB Range
• Auto Lip Sync
• Audio
• Monitor Out
n Audio Setup (vpage 31, 32)
• EXT. IN Setup
· Surround Speaker
· Subwoofer Level
• 2ch Direct/Stereo
• Downmix Option
• Auto Surround
• Manual EQ
Multi-Zone
n STEREO
n DIRECT
n STANDARD
n DOLBY PLIIx, DOLBY PLII or
DOLBY PL)
n DTS NEO:6
n neural
n 7CH STEREO
n WIDE SCREEN
n SUPER STADIUM
n ROCK ARENA
n JAZZ CLUB
n CLASSIC CONCERT
n MONO MOVIE
n VIDEO GAME
n MATRIX
n VIRTUAL
n XM
• Play
• Preset Skip
• Antenna Aiming
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
Remote Control
n Audio
• Surround Parameters
· Mode
· Cinema EQ
· DRC
· D.COMP
· LFE
· Center Image
· Panorama
· Dimension
· Center Width
· Delay Time
· Effect
· Effect Level
· Room Size
· AFDM
· SB CH Out
· Subwoofer Att.
· Subwoofer
· Default
• Tone
· Tone Defeat
· Bass
· Treble
• Room EQ
• RESTORER
• Night Mode
• Audio Delay
n Picture Adjust
• Contrast
• Brightness
• Chroma Level
• Hue
n NET/USB
• Play
• Playback Mode
• Still Picture
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
Playback
Parameter
n CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL,
SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX
• Play (iPod)
• Playback Mode (iPod)
• Assign
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Video Convert (Excluding CDs)
· Source Level
Setup
n TUNER (FM/AM)
• Play
• Auto Preset
• Preset Skip
• Preset Name
• Input Mode
• Rename
• Other
· Video Select
· Source Level
Connections
n Status
• MAIN ZONE
• ZONE2/3/4
n Audio Input Signal
n HDMI Information
n Auto Surround Mode
n Quick Select
n Preset Station
Getting Started
GUI Menu Map
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
27
2007/05/11
16:15:16
Getting Started
Preparations
1 MIC
Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP
Auto Setup
Connections
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
• This procedure lets you measure the acoustic properties of your
speakers and listening room and make the optimum settings
automatically.
• This function provides the optimum listening environment for all
listening positions in a home theater where several people view or
listen to the video or audio source simultaneously.
The measurements are performed by moving the setup microphone
successively to the different positions where the family members
sit within the listening area surrounded by the speakers, as
shown in Example q. For better results, we recommend making
measurements in 6 or more positions.
Even if the home theater is only used by a small number of persons
as shown in Example w, measuring at points around the listening
position results in more effective correction.
Example q
jack on the main unit.
The auto setup screen appears automatically.
Sound
receptor
2
Mount the setup microphone on a camera tripod,
etc., and set it at the main listening position, with the
sound receptor pointing towards the ceiling.
Example w
Multi-Zone
Setup
microphone
( :Measuring positions)
Information
b Adjust the height of the setup microphone’s sound receptor so
that it is at the height of the ears when listening.
*M
*M
Troubleshooting
About the main listening position (*M)
The main listening position refers to the center of the listening
position, or the place where you would sit to watch or listen when
alone.
This position is used as the basis when measuring the distance of
the speakers.
When using a subwoofer with a setting function, make the following
settings before starting the auto setup procedure:
• Volume: “Center”
• Crossover frequency: “Maximum”
• Low pass filter: “Off”
• Standby mode: “Off”
NOTE
• Do not disconnect the setup microphone until the auto setup
procedure is completed.
• When using headphones, unplug the headphones before starting
the auto setup procedure.
To set the listening environment manually to suit your tastes, see page
28 ~ 30.
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
28
2007/05/11
16:15:17
Optimize settings for speakers in use.
F Menu tree F
a Auto Setup
s Option
d Parameter
Start auto setup and output the test tone.
Set as desired before starting the auto setup procedure.
If an error message appears during the measurements, check “Error
messages”, take the necessary countermeasures, then redo the
measurements (vpage 27).
7.1 (B)
7.1
5.1
The settings are performed automatically.
STEP1:Speaker Detect
STEP2:Measurements (2 to 8 positions)
STEP1 : Speaker Detect
The speaker connection status and the speaker polarities are detected at
the main listening position. At this time, the listening environment with
respect to the main listening position (“Speaker size check”, “Distance
correction”, “Channel level adjustment”, “Crossover frequency check”
and “Room EQ correction”) is measured automatically at the main
listening position.
Once the measurements are completed, the results of the speaker
connection are displayed.
NOTE
• Loud test tones are output during the measurements. Be careful
when measuring at night or when there are small children nearby.
• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow
obstacles between them while the measurements are being made.
Obstacles will make it impossible to measure correctly.
• Keep as quiet as possible during measurements. Loud sounds in the
area will make it impossible to measure correctly.
• Operating the MASTER VOLUME knob on the main unit or the VOL
+/– buttons on the remote control unit during the measurements will
cancel the measurements.
• Do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume after
“STEP1”.
STEP4: Check
Once the auto setup procedure is completed, a measuring result
checking screen appears.
Select any item whose measuring results you want to check and check
the results.
Values that are different from the actual distance may be set for
speakers with built-in filters (subwoofers, etc.).
STEP5: Store
The auto setup measurement results are stored.
Troubleshooting
STEP5:Store
NOTE
The items selectable at “Config.” differ according to the “Amp Assign”
settings.
The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers
connected. The more the number of speakers, the longer the time
required for analysis.
Information
STEP4:Check
Amp Assign
Advanced setting : changes power amplifier assignment.
Multi-Zone
STEP3:Calculation
Setting the speaker configuration reduces the time required to analyze
the speakers during the auto setup procedure.
Remote Control
GAuto setup flowH
STEP3: Calculation
When “Calculate” is selected at “STEP2”, the speaker system is
analyzed automatically.
Playback
[Selectable items]
a Auto Setup
Measure a total of at least 6 positions (main listening position and at
least 5 other surrounding positions). Measurements can be completed
even if only taken in 5 positions, but for better results we recommend
taking them in 6 or more positions. (Measurements can be taken in
a maximum of 8 positions.)
Setup
Configuration
The speaker system to be measured can be selected ahead of time
here.
Connections
Auto Setup
STEP2: Measurements
The listening environment with respect to the listening position
(“Speaker size check”, “Crossover Frequency check” and “Room EQ
correction”) is measured automatically at positions 2 to 8.
Once a measurement is made, move the setup microphone to the
next position.
Getting Started
Start
Auto Setup
NOTE
Do not turn the power off while the settings are being stored in the
memory.
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
29
2007/05/11
16:15:21
Getting Started
Error Messages
s Option
If the auto setup procedure could not be completed due to speaker installation, the measuring environment, etc., an error
message is displayed. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform
the auto setup procedure over again.
Select settings for room EQ, mic, etc.
Connections
Error messages (examples)
Room EQ
Cause
Measures
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
• Connect the included setup microphone to the SETUP MIC
jack on the main unit.
• Not all speakers could be detected.
• Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high • Too much noise in the room for accurate • Either turn off any device generating noise or move it
or Level is too low
measurements to be made.
away.
• Try again when the surroundings are quiet.
• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for • Check the speaker installation and the direction in which
accurate measurements to be made.
the speakers are facing.
• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
None
• Displayed speaker could not be detected.
• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
· The front L and front R speakers were not
properly detected.
· Only one channel of the surround (A) and
surround (B) speakers was detected.
· Sound was output from the R channel when only
one surround back speaker was connected.
· The surround back or the surround (B) speaker
was detected, but the surround (A) speaker
was not detected.
Phase
• Displayed speaker connected with the polarities • Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.
reversed.
• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed
even if the speaker is properly connected. In this case,
select “Skip”.
No microphone or speaker
• Included setup microphone is not connected.
Troubleshooting
Select “Retry” to make the measurements again.
NOTE
Be sure to turn the power off before checking the speaker connections.
Select room EQ setting method.
[Selectable items]
All
Assign
Direct Mode
Select room EQ use for DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
Mic Select
Select the microphone type if not using supplied mic.
The microphone connected to V.AUX Lch is used.
[Selectable items]
Mic V.AUX L
d Parameter Check
Check auto setup measurement results.
This is displayed after the auto setup procedure
is completed.
[Items to be checked] Spkr Config Check
Ch. Level Check
Distance Check
Crossover Check
EQ Check
The auto setup results can be reset when “Restore” is selected.
1.AVR4308_P1~P27.indd
30
2007/05/11
16:15:22
dDistance
Select surround speakers A use and size.
[Selectable items]
Manual Setup
Large
Small
None
Surround B
[Selectable items]
Speaker Setup
Large
Small
Select unit for distance.
None
Step
Select step. (smallest distance)
Select surround back speaker use and size.
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items]
F Menu tree F
Large
2spkrs
Manual Setup
Small
1ft
/
0.1ft z1
/
0.1m
/
0.01m z2
z1: Can be selected when “Feet” is set.
z2: Can be selected when “Meters” is set.
None
1spkr
a Speaker Configuration
s Subwoofer Mode
d Distance
g Crossover Frequency
h Surround Speaker
Select the speaker you want to set, then set the distance.
Set the value closest to the measured distance.
[Variable range]
0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
z1
/
0.00m ~ 18.00m z2
z1: Display when “Feet” is set.
z2: Display when “Meters” is set.
NOTE
Set the distance between the listening position and the various
speakers to no more than 20.0 ft (6.00 meters).
sSubwoofer Mode
Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.
Front
Select front speaker size.
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items]
Large
LFE+Main
Small
Center
Select center speaker use and size.
[Selectable items]
LFE
Troubleshooting
Select speaker configuration and size.
(bass reproduction capability)
Distance measurement
Information
aSpeaker Configuration
Resets the settings to the default values.
Multi-Zone
f Channel Level
• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the physical size of the
speaker but according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities
based on the frequency set at “Crossover Frequency” (vpage
29).
• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to
“Yes”.
• If “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to
“Large”.
• If “Surround A” is set to “None”, “Surround B” and “Surround Back”
are automatically set to “None”.
• When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left
channel (SBL).
Remote Control
Default
Speaker Setup
Playback
Surround Back
Setup
Use this procedure to set the speakers
manually or if you wish to change the
settings made with the auto setup
procedure.
Feet / Meters
Select surround speakers B use and size.
Connections
Make detail settings for various parameters.
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Before making the settings, measure the distance from
the listening position to the different speakers.
Getting Started
Surround A
Large
Small
Yes
No
Subwoofer
None
• This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” –
“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the
strongest bass.
• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be
produced from the subwoofer.
Select subwoofer use.
[Selectable items]
28
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
1
2007/05/11
16:02:32
Getting Started
Default
fChannel Level
Adjust channel levels to obtain equal volume from all
speakers.
Connections
Mode
Auto
Manual
Setup
Select surround speaker from which test tone is output.
Playback
A
B
A+B
Remote Control
Start
Output test tone.
[Variable range]
–12dB ~
gCrossover Frequency
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items]
Surround
[Selectable items]
Select surround speakers to use for each surround mode.
Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles
low range signal.
Select test tone playback method.
[Selectable items]
hSurround Speaker
Resets the settings to the default values.
0dB
~ +12dB
40Hz
60Hz
80Hz
90Hz
120Hz
150Hz
200Hz
250Hz
100Hz
110Hz
Only the portion of the bass sound of the various speakers output
from the subwoofer that has a frequency below the frequency set
here is output.
Set this according to the low frequency reproduction capabilities of the
speakers you are using.
Advanced :
A
B
A+B
Operating from the main remote control unit
Press the SPKR button.
Surround A
Surround B
Surround A+B
•This can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” - “Surround
A” and “Surround B” are used (vpage 28).
•When using the pre-out connectors, select and use either “Surround
A” or “Surround B”.
•Make the surround speaker settings when the input mode is set to
“EXT. IN” at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Audio Setup” – “EXT. IN
Setup” (vpage 31).
Set the crossover frequency separately for the different speakers.
Information
GAdjusting using test tonesH
q Press the TEST button.
Test tones are output from the various speakers.
w Use the o p button to adjust so that the volume is equal for all
speakers.
e When the adjustments are completed, press the TEST button
again.
Troubleshooting
Multi-Zone
Operating from the main remote control unit
Adjusting with the main remote control unit using the test tones is
only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the STANDARD
mode. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically
stored in the memory.
•The “Crossover Frequency” can be set when there are speakers that
have been set to “Small” at GUI menu “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker
Configuration” or when “Subwoofer” is set to “Yes” (vpage 28).
•If GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Subwoofer Mode”
(vpage 28) is set to “LFE”, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker
Configuration” can be set. If set to “LFE+Main”, this can be set
regardless of the size of the speaker.
•For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency
is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
•Always set the crossover frequency to “80 Hz”. When using small
speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency
to a higher frequency.
•When the GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” – “Surround Back”
setting (vpage 28) is set to “1spkr”, the surround back speaker
display is set to “Surround Back”.
•Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Configuration” settings are
not displayed.
•“Surround” can be set when GUI menu “Speaker Configuration” –
“Surround A” or “Surround B” is set to “Large” or “Small” (vpage
28).
•When using surround speakers, be sure to adjust the volume of the
different speakers.
•When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for
all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the
different surround modes, use the operation see page 59.
29
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
2
2007/05/11
16:02:33
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
dProgressive Mode
jAuto Lip Sync
Select optimum progressive mode for video material.
Automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video
output.
[Selectable items]
F Menu tree F
Auto
Video1
Video2
HDMI Setup
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
a i/p Scaler
d Progressive Mode
This sets the aspect ratio when outputting 480i/576i or
480p/576p input signals from the HDMI output connector.
Full
Normal
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
l Monitor Out
Make settings for output color space.
Make settings for i/p scaler function.
[Selectable items]
A to H & H to H
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
RGB
Press the M.SEL button.
Auto
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
720p
hRGB Range
Make settings for RGB output range.
[Selectable items]
Normal
Enhanced
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Auto”, connections with the MONITOR
1 or MONITOR 2 connectors are recognized automatically.
• If both the MONITOR 1 and 2 connectors are connected and
“Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a resolution
compatible with both monitors.
• If “Resolution” is set to something other than “Auto”, check the
resolutions with which your monitor is compatible at GUI menu
“Information” – “HDMI Information” – “Monitor 1” and “Monitor 2”
and set accordingly (vpage 46).
Troubleshooting
Make settings for resolution of HDMI video output signal.
When connected to a monitor with a DVI-D connector (HDCP
compatible) using an HDMI/DVI converter cable, the signals are output
in RGB format, regardless of this setting.
Information
sResolution
1080i
Auto
OFF
A to H & H to H setting
• Deep color (10 bit/12 bit) signals are converted into 8-bit signals.
• The i/p scaler function does not work if xvYCC or computer’s
resolution signals are input.
480p/576p
YCbCr
[Selectable items]
Multi-Zone
ai/p Scaler
Auto
lMonitor Out
Operating from the main remote control unit
gColor Space
[Selectable items]
TV
Remote Control
k Audio
A to H
Amp
Make settings for HDMI monitor output.
j Auto Lip Sync
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items]
Playback
[Selectable items]
h RGB Range
kAudio
Setup
fAspect
g Color Space
OFF
Select HDMI audio output device.
s Resolution
f Aspect
ON
Connections
[Selectable items]
Manual Setup
Getting Started
HDMI Setup
1080p
This can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “OFF”.
NOTE
• It is not possible to convert “1080i” signals into “720p” format.
• It is not possible to convert “720p” signals into “1080i” format.
30
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
3
2007/05/11
16:02:34
Getting Started
Audio Setup
Make settings for audio playback.
s2ch Direct/Stereo
dDownmix Option
Make speaker settings for 2-channel mode playback.
Set dynamic range for downmix playback of Dolby Digital
sources.
Setting
F Menu tree F
[Selectable items]
To change the settings, select “Custom”.
Audio Setup
[Selectable items]
a EXT.IN Setup
s 2ch Direct/Stereo
Front
Setup
d Downmix Option
Select front speaker size.
Playback
Connections
Manual Setup
g Manual EQ
f Auto Surround Mode
[Selectable items]
Basic
Custom
Large
Small
fAuto Surround Mode
Remote Control
Make setting for memorizing surround mode setting for
each input signal type.
Select subwoofer use.
Make speaker settings for EXT. IN mode playback.
Yes
[Selectable items]
No
[Selectable items]
Multi-Zone
Surround Speaker
Subwoofer Mode
Select the surround speakers to use.
Select low range signal to be reproduced by subwoofer.
[Selectable items]
A
B
A+B
[Selectable items]
LFE
LFE+Main
Information
Subwoofer Level
Crossover
Set the subwoofer level for playback.
Select according to the player in use.
Select crossover frequency from which subwoofer handles low range
signal.
[Selectable items]
0dB
+5dB
Troubleshooting
We recommend setting to “+15 dB”.
+10dB
+15dB
[Selectable items]
OFF
• Set this to “ON” if the sound from the front speakers seems
distorted.
• When not using the center speaker or surround speakers, the
playback sound is down-mixed and output from the front speakers.
Subwoofer
aEXT. IN Setup
ON
40Hz
60Hz
80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
110Hz
120Hz
150Hz
200Hz
250Hz
ON
OFF
• The auto surround mode function lets you store in the memory the
surround mode last used for playing the four types of input signals
listed below.
q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals
w Dolby Digital and DTS 2-channel signals
e Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel signals
r Multi-channel signals other than Dolby Digital and DTS (PCM,
DSD, etc.)
• When playing in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does
not change even if the input signal is changed.
Distance FL
Set distance from listening position to front left speaker.
[Variable range]
0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
/
0.00m ~ 18.00m
Distance FR
Set distance from listening position to front right speaker.
[Variable range]
0.0ft ~ 60.0ft
/
0.00m ~ 18.00m
31
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
4
2007/05/11
16:02:35
aNetwork Setup
Adjust tonal quality for each speaker using graphic
equalizer.
Make settings for wired or wireless LAN.
Getting Started
gManual EQ
Wired LAN
Adjust CH
[Selectable items]
Each
L/R
Connections
Make settings for wired LAN.
Select speaker adjustment method.
Turn on the AVR-4308CI’s power.
All
If a Ethernet cable is connected
The mode automatically switches to “Wired”.
Select the speaker and frequency band and adjust the level.
125
8k
16k
250
500
1k
2k
4k
To enter the IP address manually
–20dB ~ +6dB
Curve Copy
Yes
No
To connect via proxy server
Default
Information
“Curve Copy” is displayed after the auto setup procedure has been
performed.
Multi-Zone
At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network
Setup” – “Detail” setting, set “DHCP” to “OFF”
and enter the IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway, primary DNS and secondary DNS.
Copy “Flat” curve from Room EQ.
[Selectable items]
To acquire the IP address automatically
using the DHCP function
Remote Control
[Variable range]
63
Playback
[Selectable items]
Setup
Manual EQ
To not pass through the proxy server
Troubleshooting
This setting is required when the network
is established via proxy servers.
Resets the settings to the default values.
At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network
Setup” – “Proxy” setting, set “Proxy” to “ON”
and enter the address or domain name and
port numbers.
Network Setup
Make network settings.
F Menu tree F
Manual Setup
This completes the setting.
Network Setup
Network Setup
Other
Network Information
Recheck the connections and settings if you cannot connect to the Internet (vpage 20).
NOTE
Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings. For details, consult a network administrator.
32
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
5
2007/05/11
16:02:38
Getting Started
Wireless LAN settings
Make settings for wireless LAN.
Turn on the AVR-4308CI’s power.
Connection
Connections
The mode automatically switches to “Wireless”.
Setup
If no Ethernet cable is connected
Display GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup”.
To acquire the IP address automatically
using the DHCP function
To enter the IP address manually
Playback
Display GUI menu “Network Setup”
Access point settings
Remote Control
To search for the network automatically
To set manually
Search
Multi-Zone
Information
If searching is possible, the
access points are displayed.
Troubleshooting
Select the access point to
be set.
z
At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network
Setup” – “Detail” setting, set “DHCP” to “OFF”
and enter the IP address, subnet mask, default
gateway, primary DNS and secondary DNS.
“Detail” setting
If searching is not possible
q Input the SSID.
w If there is security, select
the encryption method.
e Input the encryption key.
r If “WEP” was selected in
step w, select the default
key.
Normally select “1”.
To not pass through the proxy server
To connect via proxy server
This setting is required
when the network is
established via proxy
servers.
Make the SSID setting at
“Manual”.
At the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Network
Setup” – “Proxy” setting, set “Proxy” to “ON”
and enter the address or domain name and
port numbers.
Without security
With security
This completes the setting.
For a encryption key and
WEP, also input the default
key.
z: This is the flow for infrastructure type communications. For ad-hoc communications, set “Mode” at
the “Detail” settings to “Ad-hoc”.
NOTE
Connection (continued on right page)
Knowledge about networks is required to make the IP address and proxy settings. For details,
consult a network administrator.
33
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
6
2007/05/11
16:02:43
Make setting for amp power save mode and computer
language environment.
Make settings for audio playback in a multizone system.
F Menu tree F
ON
–12dB ~
0dB
~ +12dB
Switch between stereo and mono output.
Zone Setup
a ZONE2
OFF
[Variable range]
Channel
Manual Setup
Make setting for power saving when not connected to network.
Adjust the right channel output level.
Connections
Power Saving
[Selectable items]
Rch Level
Zone Setup
Getting Started
sOther
[Selectable items] Stereo
Mono
s ZONE3
Set the character code type of the MP3 ID3-Tag played by USB.
AUTO
Latin
Japanese
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 system.
If the characters are not properly displayed when set to “AUTO”, set to
“Latin” or “Japanese”.
[Selectable items]
Adjust low frequency range (bass).
chi (smpl) chi (trad)
cze
dan
dut
eng
hun
ita
por (BR)
[Variable range]
–10dB ~
fre
ger
gre
heb
Treble
jpn
kor
nor
pol
por
Adjust high frequency range (treble).
rus
spa
swe
tur
fin
Display network information.
[Items to be checked] Wired or Wireless
SSID
–10dB ~
~ +10dB
0dB
~ +10dB
“Variable” is displayed when a power amplifier is assigned to the
ZONE2 output channel at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup”
– “Amp Assign”(vpage 35).
Volume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
HPF
[Selectable items]
When using speakers that cannot satisfactorily play low frequencies,
distortion of the bass sound can be reduced by setting “HPF” to
“ON”.
Power On Level
DHCP= ON or OFF IP Address
[Selectable items]
MAC Address
Lch Level
ON
–20dB –10dB 0dB
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
OFF
[Selectable items]
–12dB ~
Last
–––
–70dB ~ +18dB
Mute Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
[Variable range]
OFF
Troubleshooting
dNetwork Information
[Variable range]
0dB
–40dB 0dB
Information
ara
Variable
Multi-Zone
Select computer environment language.
Volume Level
Adjust the main volume level.
Bass
PC Language
[Selectable items]
Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE3 system.
Remote Control
sZONE3
When GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign”
(vpage 35) is set to “ZONE (MONO)”, “Bi-Wiring & ZONE (MONO)”
or “ZONE2/3 (MONO)”, the “Channel” setting is automatically set to
“Mono”.
Playback
[Selectable items]
aZONE2
Setup
Character
0dB
~ +12dB
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
[Selectable items]
Full
–40dB –20dB
34
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
7
2007/05/11
16:02:44
Getting Started
Format
sVolume Control
Option Setup
Select the video output signal format to match the monitor.
Set the main zone volume setting.
Make various other settings.
[Selectable items]
Volume Limit
F Menu tree F
Connections
Manual Setup
[Selectable items]
a Amp Assign
s Volume Control
OFF
–20dB
–10dB
0dB
Setup
Operating from the main unit
This sets the volume set when the main zone’s power is turned on.
f GUI
[Selectable items]
Playback
g Quick Select Name
h Trigger Out 1
Last
–––
–80dB ~ +18dB
Mute Level
j Trigger Out 2
[Selectable items]
Multi-Zone
A0 2Way Remote
Remote Control
l Remote ID
This sets the amount of attenuation of the volume when the mute
mode is set in the main zone.
k Digital Out
A3 Maintenance Mode
When a format other than the video format of the connected monitor
is set, the picture will not be displayed properly. Use the procedure
described below to change the video format.
Power On Level
d Source Delete
PAL
NOTE
Make a setting for maximum volume.
Option Setup
NTSC
Full
q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3
seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
w Use the o p button to make the setting.
e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.
–40dB –20dB
A1 Dimmer
A2 Setup Lock
Remove input sources that are not used from the display.
A4 Firmware Update
[Selectable items]
Information
aAmp Assign
Troubleshooting
The places where the surround amplifier and surround back amplifier
are used can be set freely according to the usage environment. This
makes it possible to output sound to rooms other than the room
(the MAIN ZONE) where surround playback is performed (multi-zone
playback) or play the sound with high quality using the front speakers
(bi-wiring/bi-amp connections).
ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE(MONO) Bi-Wiring
Bi & ZONE2 Bi & ZONE3 Bi & ZONE(MONO) Bi-Amp
2CH Bi-Wiring
2CH Bi-Amp
For details, see “Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations”
(vpage 70 ~ 72).
Text information display.
[Selectable items]
Delete
ON
OFF
Master Volume
• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.
• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected from GUI menu
“Source Select” or using the SOURCE SELECT knob on the main unit
or SOURCE SELECT button on the remote control unit.
Master volume display during adjustment.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
NET/USB / iPod / Tuner
fGUI
This sets the time the on-screen display is displayed when an operation
is performed.
Make GUI related settings.
[Selectable items]
Screensaver
[Selectable items]
ZONE2/3 ZONE2/3(MONO)
ON
NOTE
Define how the amplifier for the surround and/or surround
back speaker channels is used.
7.1CH
Text
dSource Delete
Make screensaver settings.
Use the screensaver to prevent burn-in on the monitor screen.
When set to “ON”, the screensaver is activated if there is no activity
for about 3 minutes.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
Always
30s
10s
OFF
gQuick Select Name
Change the Quick Select name.
Up to 16 characters can be input.
[Input characters]
A~Z
a~z
0~9
! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
Wall Paper
Change the GUI background.
[Selectable items]
Picture
Black
Gray
Blue
35
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
8
2007/05/11
16:02:45
A2Setup Lock
Select the conditions to turn on the trigger out 1 with
respect to the zone, input source, surround mode, HDMI
monitor, etc.
For details about the trigger out function, see page 21.
Set usage of OPT3 OUT.
Protect settings from inadvertent change.
jTrigger Out 2
This sets the conditions to turn on the trigger out 2, in the
same way as “Trigger Out 1” above.
ON
–––
NOTE
The ZONE4 operations cannot be performed when set to “Rec
Select”.
lRemote ID
Set remote control ID.
Match the ID setting of the remote control unit and the
receiver.
[Selectable items]
1
2
3
4
Setting with Respect to the Input Source
Setting with Respect to the Surround Mode
•When the HDMI monitor set to on is selected, the trigger out turns
on.
•Associated with respect to HDMI monitor that are set to “ON”.
•This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect
to the Zone” is set to “ON”.
•Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to
the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected.
Make setting for 2-way remote control unit.
[Selectable items] Used
Not Used
This sets the function for maintenance by a DENON
serviceperson or installer. (For professional use only.)
This function allows a DENON serviceperson or installer to check the
AVR-4308CI’s status and make settings via the Internet.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a DENON serviceperson or
installer.
Troubleshooting
Setting with Respect to the Monitor
A02Way Remote
A3Maintenance Mode
Information
•When the surround mode set to on is selected, the trigger out turns
on.
•Associated with respect to surround modes that are set to “ON”.
•This can be set if the “MAIN ZONE” setting at “Setting with Respect
to the Zone” is set to “ON”.
•Associated when an input source for which “Setting with Respect to
the Input Source” is set to “ON” is selected.
•When changing the remote ID, also change the “AMP”, “iPod”, “TU”
and NET/DTU modes of the main remote control unit at the same
time (vpage 64).
•When changing the remote ID, also change the sub remote control
unit at the same time (vpage 69).
•When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can
no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you
attempt to operate related buttons.
⋅ GUI menu operations
⋅ RESTORER
⋅ Night Mode
⋅ Parameter
⋅ Room EQ
⋅ Channel Level
⋅ Audio Delay
⋅ Video Format / GUI Language
•To cancel the setting, press the MENU button to re-display the “Setup
Lock” screen, then change the setting to “OFF”.
Multi-Zone
•When the input source set to on is selected, the trigger out turns
on.
•Associated with respect to the input source for zones set to “ON” at
“Setting with Respect to the Zone”.
OFF
Remote Control
•When the power of the zone turned on/off, the trigger out turns on.
•Associated with the power supply of zones set to “ON”.
ON
Playback
Setting with Respect to the Zone
[Selectable items]
Setup
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items] ZONE4 Select Rec Select
Connections
kDigital Out
Getting Started
hTrigger Out 1
When using a 2-way remote control unit (RC-7000CI and RC-7001RCI,
sold separately), set this to “Used”.
A1Dimmer
Adjust display brightness of the receiver.
[Selectable items]
Bright
Dim
Dark
OFF
Operating from the main unit
Press the DIMMER button.
Bright
OFF
Dim
Dark
36
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
9
2007/05/11
16:02:46
Getting Started
A4Firmware Update
Update the firmware of the receiver.
[Selectable items]
Language
This sets the language used on the display
screens.
F Menu tree F
Connections
Start :
Source Select
Manual Setup
Setup
Execute the update process.
When updating starts, the power indicator lights red. “Updating
zzz” is shown on the display during updating. Once updating is
completed, “Updating complete” is displayed.
“Latest firmware” is displayed when the firmware is the latest
version.
Playback
b If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network
environment, then update again.
Remote Control
Updating failed
Login failed
Server is busy
Connection failed
Regist failed
Display
Description
Updating failed.
Failure to log into server.
Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Failure connecting to server.
Failure registering to server.
Multi-Zone
NOTE
Language
[Selectable items]
English
Français
Operating from the main unit
q Press and hold the STATUS and RETURN buttons for at least 3
seconds.
“Video Format” appears on the display.
w Use the ui button to set “GUI Language”.
w Use the o p button to make the setting.
e Press the ENTER, MENU or RETURN button to complete the setting.
Use this procedure to select the input source and make the settings
related to playing input sources.
Input Source Selection
F Menu tree F
Source Select
TUNER
PHONO
CD
DVD
HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
Information
Troubleshooting
• Connection to the network and specific settings are required to
update the firmware. For details, see page 20, 32 ~ 34.
• Do not turn off the power until updating is completed.
• Normally there is no need to use this function, aside from the cases
described below.
⋅ The Firmware Update function is only used for updating the
firmware (free or for a charge) via the Internet, for example for the
purpose of adding functions to the AVR-4308CI in the future.
⋅ Information regarding the Firmware Update function will be
announced on the DENON web site each time related plans are
defined.
⋅ A broadband connection to the Internet is required to use this
function (v page 20).
⋅ Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1
hour is required for the updating procedure to be completed. Once
updating starts, normal operations on the AVR-4308CI cannot be
performed until updating is completed.
Furthermore, updating the firmware may reset the backup data for
the parameters, etc., set for the AVR-4308CI.
⋅ When updating the firmware, we recommend using wired
connections (Ethernet cable).
DVR
V.AUX
NET/USB
XM
HD Radio
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
GOperation on the main unitH
Turn the SOURCE SELECT knob.
b If “Rec Select” or “Video Select” is selected for the input source,
press the SOURCE button before turning the SOURCE SELECT knob.
GOperation on the main remote control unitH
Press the SOURCE SELECT button.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
(Main unit)
(Main remote control unit)
37
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
10
2007/05/11
16:02:47
a Play
d Preset Skip
h Rename
a Play
Skip
fPreset Name
z : “Play” and “Playback Mode (iPod)” are displayed for input sources
for which “iPod dock” is assigned.
aPlay
A1 ~ G8
Select the preset memory number.
The playback screen is displayed.
[Input source]
Assign name to a preset memory.
Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.
TUNER
NET/USB XM
HD Radio
( iPod )
[Input source]
TUNER
HD Radio
[Characters that can be input]
A ~ Z a ~ z 0 ~ 9 ! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
sAuto Preset
Troubleshooting
j Other
NET/USB
8
Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.
[Input source]
TUNER
[Selectable items]
Start
Information
h Rename
7
Multi-Zone
g Input Mode
6
h Rename
j Other
k Playback Mode (iPod)z
l Assign
5
Remote Control
a Playz
4
When set to “All” or “Skip”, it is possible to skip entire preset memory
blocks (A to G).
g Input Mode
h Rename
CD, DVD, HDP, TV/CBL, SAT, VCR, DVR, V.AUX
3
Playback
f Preset Name
g Input Mode
j Other
ON
2
XM
d Preset Skip
f Preset Name
h Rename
[Selectable items]
s Auto Preset
1
HD Radio
Setup
a Play
d Preset Skip
g Input Mode
TUNER
[Selectable items] All
HD Radio
s Auto Preset
PHONO
[Input source]
j Other
a Play
j Other
Select the preset channel(s) you do not want to display.
g Input Mode
TUNER
Connections
Source Select
A~G
A2 Antenna Aiming
Settings Related to Playing
Input Sources
F Menu tree F
Make settings to skip preset memory numbers during
auto preset.
XM
Getting Started
dPreset Skip
Source Select
To operate the AVR-4308CI using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 61 “Remote Control
Unit Operations”).
HD Radio
A0 Playback Mode
A1 Still Picture
g Input Mode
If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired
station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.
h Rename
j Other
38
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
11
2007/05/11
16:02:49
Getting Started
gInput Mode
Connections
Make input mode and decode mode settings for this
source.
The selectable input modes depend on the input source
and “Assign” setting (vpage 40).
Decode Mode
Video Convert
Set the decode mode for this source.
Automatically convert video input signal to monitor output format.
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP
DVR
[Selectable items] Auto
Input Mode
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
V.AUX
PCM
Setup
TUNER
PHONO
Analog
[Selectable items]
EXT. IN
Playback
NET/USB XM
[Input source]
Remote Control
[Selectable items]
Auto
( iPod )
HD Radio
DTS
[Selectable items]
hRename
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR
V.AUX
Multi-Zone
Auto
HDMI
Digital
[Characters that can be input]
A~Z a~z 0~9
[Selectable items]
Analog
EXT. IN
! “ # % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)
Information
Troubleshooting
Press the INPUT MODE button on the main unit or the INPUT button on
the main remote control unit.
Auto
HDMI
EXT. IN
Digital
Analog
z1:This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” (vpage 40).
z2: This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “Digital” (vpage 40).
VCR
DVR
ON
OFF
Corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.
[Variable range]
~ +12dB
kPlayback Mode (iPod)
Make settings for“iPod”playback.
CD DVD HDP
DVR
Switch video input source while listening to audio signal.
[Selectable items] All
[Selectable items]
TV/CBL
0dB
For input sources for which “HDMI” and “Digital” are set at the GUI
menu “Assign” setting, the analog input level and digital input level can
be set separately.
[Input source]
Video Select
DVD HDP
–12dB ~
Make settings for repeat mode.
Make various other settings.
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
SAT
Repeat
jOther
•When a digital signal is properly input, the “
” or “
”
indicator lights on the display. If the “
” indicator does not light,
check the digital input connector assignment and the connections.
•The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “EXT.
IN”.
TV/CBL
Source Level
•This can be selected for input sources for which the GUI menu
“Assign” setting is set to “HDMI” or “Digital” (vpage 40).
•Only set “PCM” and “DTS” when playing the respective signals.
Change the display name for this source.
Names containing up to 8 characters can be input.
EXT. IN
DVD HDP
V.AUX
Set the input mode for this source.
[Input source]
[Input source]
SAT
VCR
DVR V.AUX
Source
Operating from the main unit
Press the VIDEO SELECT button, then turn the SOURCE SELECT knob until
the desired picture appears.
b To cancel, turn the <SOURCE SELECT> control while pressing the
<VIDEO SELECT> button and select “Source”.
NOTE
•It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.
•When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of
another input source cannot be selected for the HDMI video output.
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
V.AUX
One
OFF
Shuffle
Make settings for shuffle mode.
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP
DVR
V.AUX
[Selectable items] Songs Albums OFF
This can be selected for input sources for which “Assign” is assigned
at the “iPod dock” setting.
39
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
12
2007/05/11
16:02:50
Assign input sources to input connectors.
Digital
iPod dock
Select digital input connector to assign to this source.
Assign Control Dock for iPod to this source.
[Input source]
HDMI
VCR
DVD HDP
V.AUX
1
3
2
VCR
[Selectable items]
[Input source]
V.AUX
Coaxial1 ~ 3
CD DVD HDP
DVR
Optical1 ~ 4
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
V.AUX
[Selectable items] Assign None
DENON LINK z None
4 None
DVD
HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR
V.AUX
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
None
None
HDMI4
None
Input
CD
DVD
source
Default Coaxial Coaxial
setting
3
1
HDP
TV/CBL
SAT
VCR
DVR
V.AUX
OFF
Coaxial Optical Optical Optical Optical
2
1
3
2
4
z: When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been
connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK”.
[Input source]
•This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is
assigned.
•When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting,
the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server
and USB), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the digital
input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3
audio output connectors and the analog REC OUT connectors.
NET/USB
USB Select
Select USB port to use.
[Selectable items] Front Rear
Component
Match the port to be used and the setting.
Select component video input to assign to this source.
Repeat
[Input source]
TV/CBL
DVR
V.AUX
1
3 None
2
Input
DVD
HDP
TV/CBL
source
Default Component Component Component
setting
1
2
3
SAT
VCR
Make settings for repeat mode.
[Selectable items] All
One
OFF
Troubleshooting
[Selectable items]
DVD HDP
Information
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is
assigned.
Make settings for “NET/USB” playback.
Multi-Zone
NOTE
A0Playback Mode
Remote Control
NOTE
•With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously.
When HDMI is assigned to an input source, the audio signal switches
to HDMI along with the video signal. To use with the digital audio
input connectors assigned, set GUI menu “Input Mode” to “Digital”
(vpage 39).
•When the AVR-4308CI and monitor are connected with an HDMI
cable, if the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal
playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.
•The audio signals input from the analog, digital and EXT. IN connectors
are not output to the monitor.
•With the default settings, the Control Dock for iPod can be used
connected to the VCR (iPod) connector.
Playback
Input
source
Default
setting
DVR
SAT
SAT
Random
SAT
VCR
DVR
V.AUX
None
None
None
None
This cannot be set for input sources for which “iPod dock” is
assigned.
Make random mode settings.
[Selectable items]
ON
Setup
[Selectable items]
TV/CBL
DVR
TV/CBL
Connections
Select HDMI connector to assign to this source.
[Input source]
CD DVD HDP
Getting Started
lAssign
OFF
Direct Play
Set the folder to be played using the DIRECT PLAY button on the sub
remote control unit.
[Selectable items]
Favorites
All Music
40
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
13
2007/05/11
16:02:52
Getting Started
A1Still Picture
Select the “Cinema”, “Music”, “Game” and “Pro Logic” modes at GUI
menu “Parameter” – “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode”
(vpage 42 ~ 44).
Make settings for still picture (JPEG) playback.
[Input source]
NET/USB
Surround Modes
Connections
Playing Multi-channel Sources
(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.)
Slide Show
Standard Playback
Make slideshow settings.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
Setup
This is the standard mode for enjoying surround sound
according to the program source.
Interval
Playback
Set the playback time per image.
[Variable range]
5 ~ 60s
Remote Control
A2Antenna Aiming
Adjust the XM radio reception sensitivity.
[Input source]
XM
Surround Playback of 2-channel Sources
To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main unit
and main remote control unit, press the STANDARD button. The mode
switches each time the button is pressed.
Multi-Zone
Indicate satellite signal strength.
[Selectable items] DOLBY PLgx DTS NEO:6
Information
Indicate terrestrial signal strength.
Display
Condition
Troubleshooting
Signal strength is strong
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is marginal
Signal strength is weak
No signal
¡¡¡¡
¡¡¡
¡¡
¡
neural
• When not using a surround back speaker
DOLBY PLgx
or DOLBY PLg
Terrestrial
STANDARD :
This mode is for decoding the input signals according to their format
and playing surround sound.
The display when the STANDARD mode is selected depends on the
input signal and surround back output playback mode.
Input signal
• When using a surround back speaker
[Selectable items]
Satellite
[Selectable items]
DOLBY PLg
DTS NEO:6
neural
: The signals are decoded in DOLBY PLgx or
DOLBY PLg for playback.
Cinema
: This mode is suited for movie sources.
Music
: This mode is suited for music sources.
Game
: This mode is suited for games.
Pro Logic : This is the Pro Logic playback mode. This can
be selected when playing with a DOLBY PLg
decoder. When this mode is selected, “DOLBY
PL” is displayed.
DTS NEO:6
: The signals are decoded in DTS NEO:6 for
playback.
Cinema
: This mode is suited for movie sources.
Music
: This mode is suited for music sources.
neural
Dolby
Digital
Source
: It is possible to play analog input signals and
PCM (2-channel) in the surround mode.
This is the optimum mode for playing sources
recorded in XM HD Surround (vpage 49).
DTS
Surround
Source
DVDAudio,
SACD
DOLBY DIGITAL
(other than 2ch) /
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
Plus
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS (5.1ch) /
DTS-ES Discrete
6.1 /
DTS-ES Matrix
6.1 /
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
DTS-HD Master
Audio
PCM (multi ch) /
DSD (multi ch)
Display
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx CINEMA
DOLBY DIGITAL+PLgx MUSIC
DOLBY DIGITAL +
DOLBY TrueHD
DTS SURROUND
DTS+PLgx CINEMA
DTS+PLgx MUSIC
DTS+NEO:6
DTS ES MTRX6.1 (z1)
DTS ES DSCRT6.1 (z2)
DTS 96/24 (z3)
DTS-HD
DTS-HD MSTR
MULTI CH IN
MULTI IN+PLgx CINEMA
MULTI IN+PLgx MUSIC
MULTI CH IN 7.1
z1 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”
and the AVR-4308CI’s “AFDM” setting is set to “ON”.
z2 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS-ES Discrete
6.1”.
z3 : This is displayed when the input signal is “DTS 96/24”.
For details, see page 79.
41
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
14
2007/05/11
16:02:53
[Selectable items]
[Selectable items]
STEREO :
This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.
Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.
Parameter
Audio
a Surround Parameters
DSD DIRECT (z)
MULTI CH DIRECT
M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA
M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC
M DIRECT 7.1
DSD MULTI DIRECT (z)
z : When DSD signals are converted to PCM signals as set by the
audio parameters and speaker settings, “DIRECT” or “MULTI CH
DIRECT” is displayed.
For details, see page 80.
Playback in the Pure Direct Mode
This is the mode that recreates the original sound most
faithfully, providing extremely high quality sound.
Press the PURE DIRECT button on the main unit.
s Tone
d Room EQ
f RESTORER
g Night Mode
h Audio Delay
aSurround Parameters
Adjust surround sound parameters.
The adjustable parameters differ for the different surround
modes (vpage 77, 78).
Mode
Select the mode according to the playback source.
[Selectable items]
In the PLgx or PLg mode: Cinema
• When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the GUI screen is not displayed
and the display on the main unit is turned off.
• If the HDMI input connector is selected, video outputs are output in
the PURE DIRECT mode.
• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE DIRECT
mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.
Troubleshooting
Stereo Playback
F Menu tree F
DIRECT
Music
Information
• To select these surround modes using the buttons on the main unit
or main remote control unit, press the [SIMULATION] button. The
mode switches each time the button is pressed.
• Depending on the program source being played, it may not be
possible to achieve a satisfactory surround effect. In this case, try
other modes to achieve a sound field suited to your tastes.
DSD (multi ch)
Audio
Adjust various audio parameters.
Multi-Zone
mode, the sound will be off balance with a single channel (left or
right), so input to both channels.
PCM (multi ch)
Parameters can be called out directly by pressing the PARA button on
the main remote control unit.
Remote Control
z: When playing sources recorded in monaural in the MONO MOVIE
Display
Input signal
Analog signal /
PCM (2ch) /
Dolby Digital source /
DTS source /
Other 2-channel digital signals
DSD (2ch)
Parameter
Playback
: This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from
all speakers.
: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of
WIDE SCREEN
viewing a movie on a large screen.
SUPER STADIUM : This mode is suited for viewing sports
programs.
: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
ROCK ARENA
live concert in an arena.
: This mode is for enjoying the atmosphere of a
JAZZ CLUB
live concert in a jazz club.
CLASSIC CONCERT : This mode is for appreciating classical concert
programs.
z
: This mode is for playing monaural movie
MONO MOVIE
sources with surround sound.
: This mode is suited for achieving surround
VIDEO GAME
sound with video games.
: This mode lets you add a sense of expansion
MATRIX
to stereo music sources.
: This mode is for enjoying surround effects
VIRTUAL
using only the front speakers or headphones.
DIRECT :
In this mode the signals bypass the tone adjustment circuitry for high
quality sound.
The sound is output to the same channels as the input signal.
The display when the DIRECT mode is selected depends on the input
signal.
For multi-channel sources, the display depends on the surround back
output’s play mode.
Setup
7CH STEREO
[Selectable items]
Connections
The desired mode according to the program source and
viewing situation can be selected from among 10 DENON
original surround modes.
The surround parameters can be adjusted (vpage 77, 78)
to achieve an even more realistic, powerful sound field.
Direct Playback
Getting Started
DSP Simulation Playback
Game
Pro Logic z
In the DTS NEO:6 mode:
Cinema
Music
z: Can be selected in the PLg mode.
The “Music” mode is also effective for movie sources including a lot
of stereo music.
42
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
15
2007/05/11
16:02:54
Getting Started
Cinema EQ
Soften the treble
understanding.
range
of
movie
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
soundtracks
for
better
Connections
Dimension
AFDM
Shift sound image center to front or rear, to adjust playback balance.
Auto-select surround mode by source.
This function only works for software containing a special identification
signal.
If the software being played is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES,
it is played in 6.1-channels. If not, it is played in 5.1-channels.
[Variable range]
0
~
~
3
6
Center Width
DRC
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
[Selectable items]
Auto
Low
Middle
High
OFF
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider
sound.
[Variable range]
0
~
~
3
7
Setup
Playback
Adjust delay time to control sound stage size.
D.COMP
[Variable range]
Remote Control
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
[Selectable items]
OFF
Low
Middle
High
Multi-Zone
When playing DTS sources, this is only displayed for compatible
software.
0 ms ~
~ 300 ms
30 ms
Effect
Switch effect signal for multi-surround speakers on and off.
[Selectable items]
ON
ON
OFF
Example : Playing Dolby Digital software (with EX flag)
•When “AFDM” is set to “ON”, the surround mode is automatically
set to the DOLBY + PLgx CINEMA mode.
•To play in the Dolby Digital EX mode, set “AFDM” to “OFF” and “SB
CH Out” to “MTRX ON”.
Delay Time
This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.
[Selectable items]
OFF
Some Dolby Digital EX sources do not include EX flags. If the playback
mode does not switch automatically even when “AFDM” is set to
“ON”, set “SB CH Out” to “MTRX ON” or “PLIIx CINEMA”.
SB CH Out (for Multi-channel sources)
Select playback mode for surround back channels.
Effect Level
[Selectable items]
LFE
Adjust effect signal level.
NON MTRX MTRX ON PLIIx CINEMA z1 PLIIx MUSIC z2
Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).
[Variable range]
Information
[Variable range]
–10dB ~
~
10
Troubleshooting
Center Image
Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the
surround signals seems unnatural.
Room Size
Determine size of acoustic environment.
[Selectable items]
Small
Medium small
Medium large
Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider
sound.
0.0
~
0.3
ES MTRX z3 ES DSCRT z4 OFF
~ 15
0dB
For proper playback of the different program sources, we recommend
setting to the values below.
•Dolby Digital sources: “0 dB”
•DTS movie sources: “0 dB”
•DTS music sources: “-10 dB”
[Variable range]
1
~
1.0
Medium
Large
NOTE
“Room Size” does not indicate the size of the room in which sources
are played.
z1:This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”
at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup” – “Speaker
Configuration” setting (vpage 28).
z2:This can be selected when “Surround Back” is set to “2spkrs”
or “1spkr” at the GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Speaker Setup”
–“Speaker Configuration” setting.
z3:This can be selected when playing DTS sources.
z4:This can be selected when playing DTS sources including a
discrete 6.1-channel signal identification signal.
SB CH Out (for 2-channel sources)
Determine whether to use surround back speakers.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
Panorama
Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels, for wider sound.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
43
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
16
2007/05/11
16:02:56
Attenuate subwoofer level when using EXT. IN mode.
[Selectable items]
ON
OFF
Subwoofer
ON
OFF
This function restores compressed audio signals to how
they were before compression and corrects the sense of
volume of the bass to obtain richer playback sound.
[Selectable items]
Audyssey
:Optimize frequency response of all speakers to
match room acoustics.
Audyssey Byp. L/R :Optimize frequency response of speakers except
Audyssey Flat
Manual
OFF
front speakers to match room acoustics.
:Optimize frequency response of all speakers to
flat response.
:Apply frequency response set with “Manual
EQ”.
:Turn equalizer off.
Default
Press the ROOM EQ button on the main unit or the EQ button on the
main remote control.
sTone
Tone Defeat
OFF
Manual
When “Audyssey” is selected, “
Turn tone adjustments off.
OFF
Adjust low frequency range (bass).
Audyssey Flat
” lights.
When “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, or when
the auto setup measuring results have changed, “
” lights.
•“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be set
after the auto setup procedure has been performed.
•If the settings of speakers for which “None” has been determined
at “Auto Setup” are changed, “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and
“Audyssey Flat” cannot be selected.
•When using headphones, “Room EQ” is set to “OFF”.
During playback, press the RESTORER button on the main unit or the
RSTR button on the main remote control unit.
When set to something other than “OFF”, “
” is displayed.
OFF
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
About the RESTORER function
•Such compressed audio formats as MP3, WMA (Windows Media
Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating
signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The
RESTORER function generates the signals eliminated upon
compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the
original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of
volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio
signals.
•This is displayed on the GUI menu and can be set when the input
source is set to “XM”, “HD Radio” or “NET/USB”, or when analog
signals (including AM/FM signals) or PCM signals (fs = 44.1/48
kHz) are input.
Troubleshooting
Bass
Audyssey Byp. L/R
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
Information
ON
The tone cannot be adjusted when in the DIRECT mode.
[Variable range]
Audyssey
Mode1 Mode2 Mode3
Multi-Zone
Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.
[Selectable items]
Operating from the main unit or main remote
control unit
OFF
Remote Control
Resets the settings to the default values.
[Selectable items]
Playback
[Selectable items]
Select room equalizer for current environment.
Setup
Sets whether or not to output subwoofer signals when in the DIRECT
or STEREO mode.
fRESTORER
Connections
Set this to “ON” if the subwoofer channel level seems too high when
playing Super Audio CDs.
dRoom EQ
Getting Started
Subwoofer Att.
–6dB ~ 6dB
Treble
Adjust high frequency range (treble).
[Variable range]
–6dB ~ 6dB
“Bass” and “Treble” can be set when “Tone Defeat” is set to “OFF”.
44
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
17
2007/05/11
16:02:57
Getting Started
gNight Mode
Picture Adjust
Optimized setting for late-night listening.
[Selectable items]
OFF
Low
Middle
Adjust the picture quality.
High
Connections
Operating from the main remote control unit
Setup
Press the NGT button.
The “
” indicator lights when “Low”, “Middle” or “High” is
selected.
OFF
Low
Parameter
Picture Adjust
Middle
Status
s Brightness
Shows information about current settings.
f Hue
Playback
F Menu tree F
Information
Status
aContrast
Remote Control
hAudio Delay
Compensate for mismatched timing between video and
audio.
Delay audio.
This sets the delay time for audio signals.
Multi-Zone
0 ms
a Contrast
d Chroma Level
High
[Variable range]
Information
F Menu tree F
~ 200 ms
Operating from the main remote control unit
Information
q Press the A. DL button.
w Use the o p button to set.
a MAIN ZONE
Adjust picture contrast.
[Variable range]
–6 ~
s ZONE2/3/4
0
~
6
aMAIN ZONE
sBrightness
Shows information about settings for main zone.
The items displayed differ according to the input source.
Adjust picture brightness.
[Variable range]
0
~ 12
[Items to be checked]
Input Source
dChroma Level
Adjust picture chroma level (saturation).
Troubleshooting
• When “Auto” or “Monitor1” is set for the GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “HDMI Setup” – “Monitor Out” setting (vpage 30), monitor 1
can be set. When “Monitor2” is set, monitor 2 can be set.
• This cannot be adjusted when playing in the EXT. IN, DIRECT or
STEREO mode (with “Front” set to “Large”, “Tone Defeat” to “ON”
and “Room EQ” to “OFF”.)
• The adjustment range is 0 to 100 ms when the Auto Lipsync
Correction function is activated.
[Variable range]
–6 ~
0
~
Room EQ
Night Mode
Surround Mode
Video Select
Input Mode
Source Level
Rec Select
RESTORER etc.
6
sZONE2/3/4
fHue
Shows information about settings for multi-zone.
Adjust color hue.
[Variable range]
Assign
Name
–6 ~
0
~
6
[Items to be checked] Power
Select Source
Volume Level
• Adjusting the “Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Chroma Level” and “Hue”
settings does not affect the HDMI input signal.
• “Hue” can be adjusted for composite video and S-Video signals.
• The adjustment values are stored for the individual input sources.
45
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
18
2007/05/11
16:02:59
HDMI Information
Quick Select
Shows information about audio input
signals.
Shows information about HDMI input/output
signals and monitor.
Shows information about quick select
settings.
F Menu tree F
F Menu tree F
F Menu tree F
Information
Audio Input Signal
[Items to be checked]
fs
Format
Offset
Flag
3
[Items to be checked]
aSignal Information
The HDMI input/output signal information is displayed.
Input Source
Input Mode
Room EQ
Auto Surround Mode setting
Volume Level
[Items to be checked] Resolution Color Space Pixel Depth
sMonitor1
The HDMI monitor 1 information is displayed.
dMonitor2
The HDMI monitor 2 information is displayed.
[Items to be checked] Interface
Supported resol.
For instructions on storing settings at Quick Select 1 to 3, see page
59.
Preset Station
Shows information about preset stations.
F Menu tree F
Information
Auto Surround
Preset Station
Shows information about auto surround
mode settings.
The surround mode for which the last
memory function was used for the different
input signal types is displayed.
A
B
C
D
E
F Menu tree F
F
Information
G
Auto Surround
[Input source]
[Items to be checked]
Analog/PCM 2ch
Troubleshooting
The figure is the correction value when the standard level is
corrected.
d Monitor2
Information
This is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources.
This function automatically corrects the standard signal level for
individual program sources.
The correction value can be checked using the STATUS button on
the main unit.
2
Multi-Zone
Dialogue normalization function
s Monitor1
Remote Control
: The input signal’s sampling frequency is
displayed.
: The number of channels in the input signal (front,
surround, LFE) is displayed.
: The dialogue normalization correction value is
displayed.
: “MATRIX” is displayed if the input signal has
undergone matrix processing, “DISCRETE” if the
input signal has undergone discrete processing.
1
Playback
: The input signal type is displayed.
Quick Select
a Signal Information
Setup
Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode is displayed.
Signal
Information
HDMI Information
Connections
Information
Getting Started
Audio Input Signal
Digital 2ch
Digital 5.1ch
Multi ch
TUNER
XM
HD Radio
NET/USB
[Items to be checked] A1 ~ G8
When the STATUS button on the main unit is pressed, the set’s status
can be checked on the display.
46
2.AVR4308_P28~46.indd
19
2007/05/11
16:03:01
Getting Started
Turning Off the Sound Temporarily (Muting)
<TUNING PRESET>
SOURCE SELECT <PHONES> <MASTER VOLUME>
Playback
Connections
Preparations
Turning the Power On
1
Setup
Press <POWER>.
Playback
Remote Control
2
Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER ON].
<ON/STANDBY> <POWER>
[
AMP]
[
TU]
(DEVICE1 mode)
Multi-Zone
Information
[POWER ON]
[POWER OFF]
[MASTER
VOLUME]
Troubleshooting
[MUTE]
[TUNER]
(AMP mode)
SOURCE
SELECT
The power indicator lights red and the power is set to the standby
mode.
[A ~ G]
[d f]
[MEMO]
[MODE]
[BAND]
The power indicator flashes green and the power turns on.
To operate the AVR-4308CI using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the AMP mode (vpage 61 “Remote Control
Unit Operations”).
Turning the Power Off
q Press <ON/STANDBY> or [POWER OFF].
The power is set to the standby mode.
w Press <POWER>.
The power indicator turns off, and so does the power.
NOTE
[CHANNEL]
[1 ~ 8]
[SHIFT]
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
]
: Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
Power continues to be supplied to some of the circuitry even when
the power is in the standby mode. When leaving home for long periods
of time or when traveling, either press <POWER> to turn off the power,
or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Operations During Playback
Press [MUTE].
To cancel, press [MUTE] again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting
the master volume.
Listening with Headphones
Plug the headphones into <PHONES>.
The sound from the speakers and pre-out connectors is automatically
cut.
NOTE
Be careful not to set the volume too high when using headphones.
Playing Video and Audio Equipment
Basic Operation
1
Prepare the equipment.
q Load the DVD, CD or other software in the player.
(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)
w To play a video device, switch the monitor input.
(vSee the monitor’s operating instructions.)
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
(vpage 61 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
Use SOURCE SELECT to select the input source.
: “Source Select” (vpage 37, 38)
Adjusting the Master Volume
Either turn <MASTER VOLUME> or press [MASTER
VOLUME].
remote control unit to the AMP mode.
4
Start playback.
(vSee the operating instructions of the respective devices.)
47
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
1
2007/05/11
16:03:44
Presetting Radio Stations
(Preset Memory)
Basic Operation
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you
can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [TUNER]
(AMP mode) to select “TUNER”.
: ”Source Select” (vpage 37, 38)
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the TUNER (DEVICE1)
mode.
Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.
Tune in the desired broadcast station.
w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)
Press [MODE] to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then use
[df] to select the station you want to hear.
b The memory block can also be selected by pressing [SHIFT].
4
Press [MEMO] again to complete the setting.
Press [A ~ G] to select the memory block.
Press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select the desired preset
channel.
n Default settings
Auto tuner presets
• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
• Stations can be preset automatically at GUI menu “Source Select”
– “Tuner” – “Auto Preset” (vpage 38).
NOTE
A1 ~ A8
87.5 / 89.1 / 98.1 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /
90.1 MHz
B1 ~ B8
520 / 600 / 1000 / 1400 / 1500 / 1710 kHz,
90.1 / 90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
E1 ~ E8
90.1 MHz
F1 ~ F8
90.1 MHz
G1 ~ G8
90.1 MHz
Troubleshooting
C1 ~ C8
D1 ~ D8
Information
Preset stations are erased by overwriting them.
• It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” in step 1 by pressing
[TUNER].
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [df] to change
frequencies continuously.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage
35).
1
2
Multi-Zone
q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)
Press [MODE] to light the “AUTO” indicator on the display, then use
[df] to select the station you want to hear.
to be preset, then press [CHANNEL] or [1 ~ 8] to select
the preset number.
Remote Control
3
4
Press [A ~ G] to select the block in which the station is
Operation on the Main Remote Control Unit
n Recalling preset stations from the remote control
unit
Playback
(vpage 61 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
Press [MEMO].
Press <TUNING PRESET>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT>
to select the preset radio station.
Setup
2
1
2
3
Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
Operation on the Main Unit
Connections
1
Either turn
Listening to Preset Stations
Getting Started
Listening to FM/AM Broadcasts
48
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
2
2007/05/11
16:03:45
Getting Started
<SOURCE SELECT>
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
Programs
<STATUS>
About XM Satellite Radio
Connections
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free
music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM
is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock
to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every
music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music
is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-tothe-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and
much more. For U.S. customers, information about XM Satellite Radio
is available online at www.xmradio.com. For Canadian customers,
information about XM Canada is online at www.xmradio.ca.
Setup
Playback
ENTER uiop
Remote Control
[
XM Ready® Legal
TU]
(DEVICE2 mode)
[
NET/DTU]
(DEVICE2 mode)
Multi-Zone
[BAND]
[d f]
[MODE]
Information
ENTER
uiop
[SEARCH]
Troubleshooting
[DTU]
(AMP mode)
[NUMBER]
[SAT TU]
(AMP mode)
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees
and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription
fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.
Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.
Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).
For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertisingsupported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or
xmradio.ca (Canadian residents).
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at
xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents).
Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2006
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
XM Ready® Subscriptions
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Dock, inserted the XM
Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Dock to your XM Ready® home audio
system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and
begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your
eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM MiniTuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID in the
following eight squares for reference.
Note: The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or
“F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-9672346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from
the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally
takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to
keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When
you can access the full channel lineup on your XM Ready home audio
system you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada,
visit XM on the Web at www.xmradio.ca or call XM’s Listener Care at
1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).
Basic Operation
1
Either turn
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
: ”Source Select” (vpage 37, 38)
2
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
the remote control unit to the TUNER (DEVICE2)
mode.
(vpage 61 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
Use [df] to select the station.
When the station is tuned in, the name of the track and artist
are displayed.
• The channel switches continuously when [df] is pressed and held.
• XM Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for
FM/AM stations (vpage 48 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset
Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”).
• The artist name, track name, category and reception level can be
checked by pressing <STATUS>.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage
35).
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
]
: Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
49
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
3
2007/05/11
16:03:47
(AMP mode) to select “XM”.
Press
1
2
Press [SEARCH].
<STATUS> until “SIGNAL” appears on the
: “Source Select” (vpage 37, 38)
3
Press [ENTER] to set that station.
Reception switches to the selected station.
• “LOADING” is displayed while stations or data are being received.
• “UPDATING” is displayed while the encoding code is being
updated.
• “XM - - -” is displayed if the selected channel cannot be used.
Press
Press [f] and select channel 0 (XM000).
The radio ID is shown on the display.
HD radio stations offer higher sound quality than
conventional FM/AM broadcasts. It is also possible to
receive data services and select broadcasts from among up
to eight multicast programs.
Using the HD Radio™ Receiver
Searching Categories
1
Press o p.
Channel category
Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with HD
Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast
programs.
For detailed information on HD Radio technology, please go to “www.
ibiquity.com”.
(vpage 61 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
3
4
Press [BAND] to select “FM” or “AM”.
Tune in the desired broadcast station.
q To tune in automatically (Auto Tuning)
Press [MODE] to select “HD Auto” or “Auto”, then use [df] to
select the station you want to hear.
• The “
” indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio
station is tuned in.
• When “HD Auto” (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio
stations are tuned in.
• If “Auto” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog
stations are tuned in.
w To tune in manually (Manual Tuning)
Press [MODE] to select “Manual”, then use [df].
• It is also possible to switch to “FM” or “AM” at step 1 by pressing
[DTU].
• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in
manually.
• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold [df] to change
frequencies continuously.
• HD Radio stations can be preset using the same procedure as for
FM/AM stations (vpage 48 “Presetting Radio Stations (Preset
Memory)” and “Listening to Preset Stations”). In addition, with HD
Radio, multicasts can also be preset.
• The time for which the GUI menu is displayed can be set at GUI menu
“Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “Tuner” (vpage 35).
Troubleshooting
The strength of both the XM satellite and terrestrial signals can be
checked at GUI menu “Source Select” – “XM” – “Antenna Aiming”
(vpage 41).
HD Radio technology provides higher quality sound than conventional
broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
• FM sounds as sensational as CDs
• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo
• A variety of “data services”, including text-based information, song
title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.
the remote control unit to the NET/DTU (DEVICE2)
mode.
Information
Radio ID
Listening to HD Radio Stations
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
Multi-Zone
<STATUS> until the station you want to check
(example: “XM001”) is displayed.
b If no button is pressed within several seconds, the station
automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.
2
Remote Control
GOOD” is shown on the display.
Example: Accessing station “XM123”:
[1] →[2] →[3]
mode) to select “HD Radio”.
Playback
Status
Signal strength is good
Signal strength is marginal
Signal strength is weak
No signal
Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:
2
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [DTU] (AMP
Setup
The display will switch as shown below, depending on the
reception conditions.
GUI
1
Press [NUMBER] then input the station’s channel.
display.
Display
GOOD
MARGINAL
WEAK
NO
3
4
5
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [SAT TU]
Basic Operation
Connections
1
2
Either turn
Accessing XM Radio Stations Directly
Getting Started
Checking the XM Signal Strength and
Radio ID
Use o p to select the category, then use ui to select
the desired station.
HD Radio™ technology manufactured under license from iBiquity
Digital Corporation. iBiquity Digital, the HD Radio logo, and the
HD logo are registered trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
HD Radio™ is a trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and
Foreign Patents.
50
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
4
2007/05/11
16:03:49
Getting Started
<SOURCE SELECT>
<STATUS>
Selecting Audio Programs
HD Radio includes up to 9 audio programs (HD1 to HD8
and Analog). The different audio programs also have data
programs.
Connections
Press [SEARCH] or ui to select the audio program.
If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, “HD1”
is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program, “HD” is
indicated.
Setup
Playback
<ON/STANDBY> uiop ENTER
If an audio program from HD2 to HD8 has been interrupted or if a program
is called out using the preset buttons after it has been interrupted, HD1 is
automatically selected after about 20 seconds.
Check the HD Radio Reception
Information
Press <STATUS> while an HD Radio broadcast is being
received.
The current reception information is shown on the display.
q Normal
↓
w Frequency / Signal strength
↓
eLong station name / Program and Program type
↓
r Title name / Artist name
↓
t Album name / Genre name
Remote Control
NOTE
[ iPod]
Multi-Zone
[8],[9],
[6],[7],
[3],[2]
If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while
“
” and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the
analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the “
” indicator and text may flicker if the station
signal level is weak and unstable.
nDefault settings
Tuner presets
Information
uiop
[SEARCH]
A1 ~ A8
ENTER
[CHANNEL + –]
Troubleshooting
[iPod]
(AMP mode)
(Main remote control unit)
[8]
[REPEAT]
B1 ~ B8
C1 ~ C8
D1 ~ D8
E1 ~ E8
F1 ~ F8
G1 ~ G8
87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /100.1 MHz
101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1
MHz
530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 / 1710 kHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
90.1 MHz
[9]
[RAMDOM]
(Sub remote control unit)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
51
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
5
2007/05/11
16:03:50
iPod® Playback
qSet the iPod in the DENON Control Dock for iPod.
(vSee the Control Dock for iPod’s operating instructions.)
w Assign the Control Dock for iPod’s input.
mode) to select the input source assigned in step 1-w
above.
Press ENTER.
Playback starts.
Stopping playback temporarily
During playback, press ENTER or [3].
Press again to resume playback.
Fast-forwarding or fast-reversing
During playback, either press and hold u (to fast-reverse) or i
(to fast-forward), or press [6] or [7].
During playback, either press u (to cue to the previous track)
or i (to cue to the next track), or press [8] or [9].
OK to disconnect
(iPod screen)
bIf the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be
properly connected. Try connecting again.
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Play”
(vpage 38)
3
To stop
During playback, either press and hold ENTER or press [2].
Playing repeatedly
Press [CHANNEL –] or [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] All
One
OFF
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –
”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Repeat” (vpage 39)
To switch between the Browse and Remote modes
Either press and hold [SEARCH].
• The title name, artist name and album name can be checked by
pressing <STATUS> during playback.
• On the AVR-4308CI, folder and file names can be displayed as
titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .
(period)”.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “iPod” (vpage
35).
Viewing Still Pictures or Videos on the
iPod
Photo data on the iPod can be viewed on the monitor. (Only
for iPods equipped with slideshow or video functions.)
1
2
3
Press and hold [SEARCH] to set the Remote mode.
Watching the iPod’s screen, use
ui to select
“Photos” or “Video”.
Press
ENTER until the image you want to view is
displayed.
Troubleshooting
To cue to the beginning of a track
Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p (up).
To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].
Information
Either turn <SOURCE SELECT> or press [iPod] (AMP
ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p
to select the music file to be played.
Use
Searching up or down pages
Multi-Zone
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” – “Assign”–
”iPod dock” (vpage 40)
1
2
: ”Source Select” – “(input source)” –
”Playback Mode (iPod)” – “Shuffle” (vpage 39)
Remote Control
1
Make the necessary preparations.
OFF
Playback
Listening to Music
Basic Operation
2
• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some
functions may not operate.
• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss of iPod
data.
[Selectable items] Albums Songs
Setup
b The iPod may only be used to copy or play contents that are not
copyrighted or contents for which copying or playback is legally
permitted for your private use as an individual. Be sure to comply
with applicable copyright legislation.
NOTE
Press [CHANNEL +] or [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.
Connections
iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
• With the default settings, the iPod can be used connected to the VCR
(iPod) connector.
• Press <ON/STANDBY> and set the AVR-4308CI’s power to the standby
mode before disconnecting the iPod. Also switch the input source
to one to which the GUI menu “iPod dock” is not assigned before
disconnecting the iPod.
Getting Started
The music on an iPod can be played by using the Control
Dock for iPod (ASD-1R, sold separately).
The operation can also be performed using the buttons on
the main unit or remote control unit while watching the GUI
menus.
Shuffling playback
“TV Out” at the iPod’s “Slideshow Settings” or “Video Settings” must
be set to “ON” in order to display the iPod’s photo data or videos on
the monitor. For details, see the iPod’s operating instructions.
To operate using the main remote control unit, set the
remote control unit to the iPod mode.
(vpage 61 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
52
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
6
2007/05/11
16:03:54
GSlide show functionH
Getting Started
Playing Network Audio or USB
Memory Devices
Connections
This procedure can be used to play Internet radio stations
or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer or
USB memory device.
nAbout the Internet radio function
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
•Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the
Internet. Internet radio stations from around the world can be
tuned in.
The AVR-4308CI is equipped with the following Internet radio
functions:
· Stations can be selected by genre and region.
· Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.
· Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media Audio)
format can be listened to.
· Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an
exclusive DENON Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a
computer.
bThe function is managed for individual users, so you must
provide your MAC or e-mail address.
Exclusive URL: http://www.radiodenon.com
bThe radio station database service may be suspended without
notice.
•The AVR-4308CI’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio
station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a
list edited and created for the AVR-4308CI.
vTuner services may be discontinued without notice.
nMusic server
Troubleshooting
This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl)
stored on a computer (music server) connected to the AVR-4308CI
via a network.
With the AVR-4308CI’s network audio playback function, connection
to the server is possible using one of the technologies below.
· Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
· Windows Media DRM10
GAlbum art functionH
When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file
includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the
music files are playing.
Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a music server can be
played as slide shows.
The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.
When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVR-4308CI, they are
played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store
in them in the direction in which you want them to play.
Installing Windows Media Player ver. 11
qIf Windows XP Service Pack 2 has not yet been installed, either
download it free of charge from Microsoft or install it via a
Windows update installer.
wDownload the latest version of Windows Media Player ver.
11, either directly from Microsoft or using a Windows update
installer.
b When using Windows Vista, there is no need to download a new
version of Windows Media Player.
nUSB memory devices
A USB memory device can be connected to the AVR-4308CI’s USB
port to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB
memory device.
· Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on the
AVR-4308CI.
· The AVR-4308CI is compatible with USB memory devices in
“FAT16” or “FAT32” format.
GAlbum art functionH
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can
be displayed while playing the file.
GSlide show functionH
Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be
played as slide shows.
The time for which each picture is displayed can be set.
[Compatible formats]
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAVz
MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
JPEG
Internet
radio
Music serverb
S
S
S
S
–
–
S
Sz
USBb
Sz
S
S
Sz
–
S
S
–
S
S
z:Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on the
AVR-4308CI.
bContents downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright
protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from
a CD, etc., on a computer may be copyright protected, depending
on the computer’s settings.
•The AVR-4308CI is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standards.
•The AVR-4308CI is compatible with WMA META tags.
[Playable formats]
WMA (Windows
Media Audio)
MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer-3)
WAV
MPEG-4 AAC
FLAC (Free
Lossless Audio
Codec)
Sampling
frequency
Bit rate
Extension
32/44.1/48 kHz
48~192 kbps
.wma
32/44.1/48 kHz
32~320 kbps
.mp3
32/44.1/48 kHz
32/44.1/48 kHz
–
16~320 kbps
.wav
.aac/.m4a/.mp4
32/44.1/48 kHz
–
.flac
WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.
When still picture (JPEG) files are played on the AVR-4308CI, they are
played in the direction in which they are stored in the folder, so store
in them in the direction in which you want them to play.
For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art
is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.
53
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
7
2007/05/11
16:03:54
1
Make the necessary preparations.
ENTER
(AMP mode) to select “NET/USB”.
: “Source Select” –“NET/USB” –“Play”
(vpage 38)
To operate using the main remote control unit, set
[
NET/DTU]
(DEVICE1 mode)
the remote control unit to the NET/DTU (DEVICE 1)
mode.
(vpage 61 “Remote Control Unit Operations”)
ui to select the menu, then press ENTER or p
to select the file you want to play.
Use
Press ENTER or p.
Searching by first letter (Character search)
This operation is convenient for choosing items from the menu screens
for Internet radio stations or files stored on the computer.
q When the menu screen is displayed, press [SEARCH] twice.
w Use o p to select the first letter you want to search for.
If there are multiple items starting with the selected letter, they are
displayed in alphabetical order.
If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.
• Use the RESTORER mode to expand the low and high frequency
components of compressed audio files and achieve a richer sound.
• The time for which the GUI menus are displayed can be set at GUI
menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “GUI” – “NET/USB”
(vpage 35).
• The display can be switched between the artist name, track name,
album name.
Playback starts.
Information
uiop
[SEARCH]
Press [SEARCH], then press o (down) or p(up).
To cancel, press ui or [SEARCH].
Multi-Zone
4
5
Searching up or down pages
Remote Control
3
During the play or pause mode, press and hold ENTER.
Playback
uiop
<SOURCE SELECT> or press [NET/USB]
To stop
Setup
2
Either turn
During playback, press ENTER.
Press again to resume playback.
Connections
q Check the network environment, then turn on the AVR-4308CI’s
power. (vpage 20 “Network Audio”)
w If settings are required, make the network settings.
(vpage 32 ~ 34 “Network Setup”)
e Prepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)
Install “Windows Media Player ver. 11”.
Stopping playback temporarily
Getting Started
Basic Operation
<SOURCE SELECT>
ENTER
Troubleshooting
[NET/USB]
(AMP mode)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
]
: Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
54
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
8
2007/05/11
16:03:56
Getting Started
Listening to Internet Radio
1
2
Use ui to select “Internet Radio”, then press ENTER
or p.
Connections
Setup
Playback
uiop
ui to select the item you want to play, then
press ENTER or p.
The station list is displayed.
A “ ” mark is indicated in front of stations that can be played.
3p
ENTER
.
Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.
1
2
3
While the Internet radio station you want to preset is
Use
Use
Presetting Internet Radio Stations
ui to select the station, then press ENTER or
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
playing, press [MEMO].
Use ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER.
[A ~ G], then press [1 ~ 8] to select the desired
preset number.
Press
The Internet radio station is now preset.
NOTE
Remote Control
[
NET/DTU]
(DEVICE1 mode)
Multi-Zone
[A ~ G]
[d f]
[MEMO]
Information
uiop
ENTER
•There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the
quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the
tracks varies widely.
Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but
depending on the communication lines and server traffic, the music
or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted.
Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less
tendency for the sound to be interrupted.
•“Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is
busy or not broadcasting.
•On the AVR-4308CI, folder and file names can be displayed as
titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “ .
(period)”.
If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously
registered setting is cleared.
Listening to Preset Internet Radio Stations
With the input source set to “NET/USB”, press [A ~ G],
then press [1 ~ 8].
The AVR-4308CI automatically connects to the Internet and playback
begins.
Recently Played Internet Radio Stations
Troubleshooting
Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from “Recently
Played” in top menu.
[1 ~ 8]
1 ENTERui p
ENTER
2 ui
Use
[NET/USB]
(AMP mode)
or
Use
press
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
to select “Recently Played”, then press
.
to select the item you want to play, then
or p.
NOTE
Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.
55
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
9
2007/05/11
16:03:57
[MEMO] while the Internet radio station you
want to register is playing.
Press
Use ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
1
2 ENTER
Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press
ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or
Selecting tracks
During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).
p.
Clearing Internet Radio Stations from Your Favorites
Use
ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER or
Use ui to select the Internet radio station you want
Playing files that have been Preset or Registered in
Your Favorites
Press o to select “Delete”.
Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the
same operations as for Internet radio stations.
to clear, then press [MEMO].
The selected Internet radio station is cleared.
To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p.
• Connect the USB memory device to the set USB port.
2 ui
3 ENTERui
Use
to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p.
Use
to select the search item or folder, then press
or p.
A “ ” mark is indicated in front of music files that can be
played, and a “ ” mark is indicated in front of image files that
can be played.
4
Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER or p.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
• By default, the front panel’s USB port will be used.
• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
Troubleshooting
p.
• Set the USB port to be used.
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“USB Select” (vpage 40)
Information
The AVR-4308CI automatically connects to the Internet and
playback begins.
• When playing still picture (JPEG) files, files can also be selected
using the operation described below.
During playback, either press [d] (previous file) or [f] (next file).
• Connections to the required system and specific settings must be
made in order to play music files (vpage 20).
• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software
and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating
instructions of your server software.
• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may
be required for the file to be displayed.
Make the necessary preparations.
Multi-Zone
ui to select the Internet radio station, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
1
2
3
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
1
Remote Control
1
2
Use
3
Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER or p.
Basic Operation
Playback
Listening to Internet Radio Stations Registered in
Your Favorites
or p.
A “ ” mark is indicated in front of music files that can be
played, and a “ ” mark is indicated in front of image files that
can be played.
Press o to select “Yes”.
The Internet radio station is registered.
If you do not want to register it, press p.
ui to select the host name of the computer on
which the music file you want to play is located, then
press ENTER or p.
Use
Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage
class and MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be
played on the AVR-4308CI.
Setup
1
2
3
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or
playlists.
Playing Files Stored on USB Memory
Devices
Connections
Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so
when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned
in easily.
Playing Files Stored on a Computer
Getting Started
Registering Internet Radio Stations as
Your Favorites
NOTE
• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.
• When the operation described below is performed, the music
server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play
preset or favorite music files.
• When you quit the music server and then restart it.
• When music files are deleted or added on the music server.
• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server
name.
56
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
10
2007/05/11
16:03:58
Getting Started
Playing repeatedly
Press [REPEAT] on the sub remote control unit.
[Selectable items] All
One
SOURCE SELECT
INPUT MODE
Operating the AVR-4308CI
Browser (Web control)
OFF
Connections
1
Check the AVR-4308CI’s IP address.
Playing in random order
: “Manual Setup” – “Network Setup” –
“Network Information” (vpage 34)
Press [RANDOM] on the sub remote control unit.
Setup
OFF
Playback
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“Random” (vpage 40)
a
This function lets you operate the AVR-4308CI using
Internet Explorer.
: “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” –
“Repeat” (vpage 40)
[Selectable items] Albums Songs
Using
<ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>
SURROUND MODE
Selecting tracks
2
Input the AVR-4308CI’s IP address in Internet
Explorer.
The AVR-4308CI can be operated in the same way as with regular
Internet browsing.
Remote Control
During playback, either press u (previous track) or i (next track).
[
Multi-Zone
Information
• When playing still picture (JPEG) files, tracks can also be selected
using the operation described below.
During playback, either press [d] (previous file) or [f] (next file).
• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the
top partition can be selected.
• The AVR-4308CI is compatible with MP3 files conforming to “MPEG1 Audio Layer-3” standards.
• If [USB] on the sub remote control unit is pressed when the USB
memory device or folder is selected, all the tracks on the USB
memory device or in the folder are played.
NOTE
Troubleshooting
• The AVR-4308CI is equipped with two USB ports, one each on the
front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with USB
memory devices connected to both the ports at the same time.
Select the USB port you want to use at the “Source Select” – “NET/
USB” – “Playback Mode” – “USB Select” menu.
• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or
damage to data on USB memory devices when using the USB
memory device connected to the AVR-4308CI.
• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
• DENON does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate
or receive power. When using a USB connection type portable hard
disk of the type for which power can be supplied by connecting an
AC adapter, we recommend using the AC adapter.
• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the AVR-4308CI’s
USB port using a USB cable.
• The AVR-4308CI is not compatible with the iPod shuffle.
NET/DTU] To use the web control function, set the GUI menu “Manual Setup”–
(DEVICE1 mode)
SURROUND
MODE
[d f]
INPUT MODE
“Network Setup” – “Other” – “Power Saving” setting to “OFF”
(vpage 34).
[SOURCE
SELECT]
(Main remote control unit)
[REPEAT]
[RAMDOM]
[USB]
(Sub remote control unit)
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
]
: Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
57
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
11
2007/05/11
16:04:02
1
Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>.
ZONE2 SOURCE
select the input source for which “DENON LINK” or
“HDMI” is assigned.
2
” or “
Select the surround mode (vpage 41, 42).
We recommend playing in the DIRECT mode.
2
RECOUT SOURCE
Turn <SOURCE SELECT> until “RECOUT SOURCE”
3
4
is displayed.
The “
Turn
” indicator lights.
<SOURCE SELECT> to choose the input source
to be recorded.
Play the program source.
Start playing the Super Audio CD.
5
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
operating instructions.
To record FM or AM broadcasts, select the broadcast (vpage
48).
Start recording.
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
operating instructions.
NOTE
•Recordings you make are for your personal enjoyment and should
not be used for other purposes without permission of the copyright
holder.
•When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting,
the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server
and USB), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the digital
input connectors cannot be output from the analog REC OUT
connectors.
Information
The “
” indicator lights on the display.
For operating instructions, refer to the respective equipment’s
operating instructions.
····
Multi-Zone
3
4
Select the input mode according to the program source to be
played.
RECOUT XM
RECOUT HD Radio
” indicator lights on the display.
Use INPUT MODE to select “Auto” (vpage 39).
ZONE2 HD Radio
Remote Control
The “
····
Playback
At the “Digital” or “HDMI” setting (vpage 40),
ZONE2 TUNER
Setup
Playing Super Audio CDs
1
“ZONE2 SOURCE” is shown on the display.
Connections
Other Operations
You can listen to one program source while recording a
different program source.
•To cancel, press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT>, then turn <SOURCE SELECT>
until “ZONE2 SOURCE” is displayed.
• Make a test recording before starting the actual recording.
• Signals are only output to the analog REC OUT connectors when
the digital signals input to the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/
COAXIAL) are PCM (2-channel) signals.
•Digital audio signals input to the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors
are not output to the REC OUT connectors, so connect using the
OPTICAL or COAXIAL connectors.
•Sources selected with the REC OUT mode are output from ZONE2
as well.
•In the REC OUT mode, the main remote control unit’s ZONE2 mode
buttons cannot be operated.
•When the “Digital Out” setting is set to “ZONE4 Select”, the
OPTICAL3 output connector becomes the ZONE4 output. When
using for recording, set to “Rec Select”.
• The “XM” and “HD Radio” digital audio output signals are not output
from the OPTICAL2 or OPTICAL3 output connectors. Also, network
audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) are not output if
they are copyright-protected.
Getting Started
Other Operations and
Functions
Recording on an External Device
(REC OUT mode)
Troubleshooting
•When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode,
the DSD signals are converted as such into analog signals. When
playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are first converted
into PCM format, then into analog signals.
• “DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD 2-channel
signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI DIRECT” is shown on
the display when playing DSD multi--channel signals in the DIRECT
mode.
58
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
12
2007/05/11
16:04:03
Getting Started
<DSP SIMULATION> <DIRECT/STEREO>
<STANDARD>
<PURE DIRECT> <STATUS>
Convenient Functions
Quick Select Function
Channel Level
With this function, the currently playing input source, input
mode, surround mode, room EQ settings and volume can
be stored in the memory.
Connections
You can adjust the channel level either according to the
playback sources or to suit your taste, as described
below.
1
2
Press CH SELECT.
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
3
Use o p to adjust the volume.
b“OFF” can be set by pressing o when the subwoofer’s volume is
set to –12 dB.
Multi-Zone
This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound from all the
front or rear speakers at once.
Information
1
2
3
Press CH SELECT.
Press ui or CH SELECT to select “FADER”.
Troubleshooting
CH SELECT
uio p
room EQ settings and volume to the conditions you
want to store.
2
Keep pressing the button until the quick select indicator lights.
The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the
buttons is pressed.
Fader Function
QUICK SELECT
Set the input source, input mode, surround mode,
Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT.
Use ui or CH SELECT to select the speaker.
<POWER>
uiop QUICK SELECT
<ZONE2 ON/OFF> CH SELECT, <ENTER>
1
[Quick Select Defaults]
Quick Select 1
Quick Select 2
Quick Select 3
Input Source
DVD
TV/CBL
VCR
Volume
–40 dB
–40 dB
–40 dB
•To call out the settings, press QUICK SELECT at which the desired
settings were stored.
• The Quick Select name can be changed (vpage 35).
NOTE
Input sources stored with the quick select function cannot be selected
if they have been deleted at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option
Setup” – “Source Delete” (vpage 35). In this case, store them
again.
Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.
(o: front, p: rear)
•The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.
•The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker adjusted
to the lowest value is –12 dB.
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
59
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
13
2007/05/11
16:04:03
Remote Lock Mode
This function sets the settings (input mode, surround
mode, etc.) last selected for the individual input sources.
When you switch to an input source, the settings are
automatically set to the ones that were set the last time
that input source was used.
The buttons on the main unit can be locked if not using
them.
This setting can be made so that the remote control unit
cannot operate the AVR-4308CI, for example when not
using it, etc.
Locking operation of all the main unit buttons
When this is set, none of the buttons on the main unit can be used.
The various settings are backed up for about 1 week,
even if the power is turned off or the power cord is
disconnected.
To operate <MASTER VOLUME> only
Turn off the power using <POWER>.
Press
while simultaneously pressing
and <ZONE2 ON/OFF>.
“Remote Lock” appears on the display.
To cancel, perform the same operation as above.
Resetting the Microprocessor
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if
operations cannot be performed.
When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are
reset to their default values.
Multi-Zone
Backup Memory
while simultaneously pressing <DSP
and <ZONE2 ON/OFF>.
1
<POWER>
2 <DIRECT/STEREO>
while simultaneously pressing
.
and
Press
while simultaneously pressing
and <DSP SIMULATION>.
Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1
If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second,
start over from step 1.
Troubleshooting
second, release the two buttons.
Information
1
<POWER>
2 <STANDARD
>
3
Turn off the power using <POWER>.
Perform the operation below to cancel the setting.
qPress <POWER>.
wPress <POWER> while simultaneously pressing <PURE DIRECT> and
<ZONE2 ON/OFF>.
Remote Control
This stores the settings as they were directly before the
standby mode was set.
When the power is turned back on, the settings are
restored to as they were directly before the standby mode
was set.
Press
.
Playback
Last Function Memory
Press
Turn off the power using
Setup
1
<POWER>
2 SIMULATION>
Turn off the power using <POWER>.
The surround parameters, tone adjustment, room EQ settings and
the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual
surround modes.
<POWER>
1
<POWER>
2 <STATUS>
<ENTER>
Connections
Panel Lock Mode
Getting Started
Personal Memory Plus Function
60
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
14
2007/05/11
16:04:04
Getting Started
Operating DENON Audio Components
Remote Control Unit Operations
1
Press
operated.
The indicator for the component to be operated flashes.
Connections
:AMP / ZONE2 / ZONE3 / ZONE4
/ SYSTEM CALL
:TUNER (FM/AM) / XM
Main Remote Control Unit
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
•On the main remote control unit, the display switches
according to the device being operated and the mode.
•In modes other than iPod, the mode switches
between“DEVICE1” and “DEVICE2” each time the [MODE
SELECTOR] is pressed.
•In the AMP, TUNER, NET/DTU and iPod modes, when
the remote ID is set, the AVR-4308CI can be used
independently even in an environment containing multiple
DENON amplifiers.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be
: iPod
: DVD player (Recorder) /
CD player (Recorder)
:NETWORK/USB /
DIGITAL TUNER (HD Radio)
: VCR / TAPE
:Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
: TV
bThe mode switches each time [AMP] is pressed.
GAMP modeH
GZONE2 modeH
GZONE3 modeH
AMP]
Presetting
The included main remote control unit can be preset to
operate devices of various brands.
1
2
3
Press
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
preset.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [NUMBER] and input the 5-digit number of the
Signal transmission
indicator
[
[HOME] is used to return to the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3,
ZONE4 or SYSTEM CALL) when in any mode other than AMP.
brand of the component to be preset. The numbers
are shown in the Preset Code Table (v End of the
this manual).
Multi-Zone
When the code is registered, the signal transmission indicator
flashes twice.
When the preset code is transmitted, the mode indicator for the
component to which that code belongs flashes.
[MODE SELECTOR]
bThe input mode is canceled if no button is operated for 10
seconds.
Information
GSYSTEM CALL modeH
GZONE4 modeH
Some brands have more than one preset code. If the component does
not operate, try inputting a different code.
Troubleshooting
Operating Preset Components
1
[HOME]
Press
2
Operate the component.
[NUMBER]
[RC SETUP]
bFor details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the component to be
operated.
The mode indicator of the device to be operated flashes.
2
Operate the component.
bFor details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your equipment,
some buttons may not operate.
NOTE
The device mode (“DEVICE1” or “DEVICE2”) cannot be changed
while the setting is being made.
61
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
15
2007/05/11
16:04:05
Getting Started
Functions of Buttons by Component
EL Display
EL Display
6 7
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
iPod
DEVICE 1
CD Recorder
VCR
TAPE
iPod
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
CD
(Default setting)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
Playback/Pause
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
DVD Recorder
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
–
Stop
Power on
Power off
Stop
–
–
Stop
–
–
Stop
Power on
Power off
Stop
–
–
Stop
–
–
MENU
u i o p
ENTER
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
–
–
–
–
–
–
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
–
–
–
SETUP/SEARCH
Set up
Set up
–
–
Set up
–
RETURN
Return
Return
–
–
Cancel
–
CH + / SHUFFLE
–
–
–
–
Switch channels
–
CH - / REPEAT
–
–
–
–
Switch channels
–
0 ~ 9, +10
Special Remarks
Select track
Select track
Select track
Select track
–
q
–
q
Menu
Cursor
Enter
Page forward
screen / Browse/
Remote mode
switching (Press
and hold)
Return
1-track/album
shuffle play
1-track/All-track
repeat play
–
–
Buttons
[0 ~ 9, +10]
Buttons
q, w
q
GSpecial RemarksH
qOnly one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.
wThe names of the functions for the DVD remote control buttons differ from brand to brand. Check beforehand.
Troubleshooting
Pause
Stop
Power on
Power off
Information
Pause
Multi-Zone
3
2
SOURCE ON
SOURCE OFF
Remote Control
[CH + /
SHUFFLE],
[CH – /
REPEAT]
8 9
DVD
(Default setting)
Playback
Auto search
(cue)
Manual search
(fast-reverse/
fast-forward)
DEVICE 2
Playback
[SETUP/
SEARCH]
[ENTER]
[uiop]
[RETURN]
1
VCR
DEVICE 1
Setup
[MENU]
Device operated
DVD
Connections
[1],
[8 9],
[6 7], [3],
[2],
[SOURCE ON],
[SOURCE OFF]
MODE SELECTOR
Device Mode
NOTE
•Preset a DVD player or DVD recorder for the “DVD” – “DEVICE1” mode. Preset a CD player or CD recorder for the “DVD” – “DEVICE2”
mode.
•Preset a VCR for the “VCR” – “DEVICE1” mode. Preset a tape deck for the “VCR” – “DEVICE2” mode.
62
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
16
2007/05/11
16:04:06
Getting Started
EL Display
EL Display
Connections
[1],
[8 9],
[6 7], [3],
[2],
[SOURCE ON],
[SOURCE OFF]
Setup
[MENU]
Playback
[SETUP]
[ENTER]
[uiop]
[DISPLAY]
Remote Control
[CH +/–]
[0 ~ 9, +10]
[TV/VCR]
Multi-Zone
Buttons
MODE SELECTOR
Device Mode
Device operated
1
8 9
6 7
3
2
SOURCE ON
SOURCE OFF
MENU
u i o p
ENTER
SETUP
DISPLAY
CH + / –
0 ~ 9, +10
TV/VCR
Special Remarks
TV
Satellite Receiver / Cable TV
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
SAT
SAT
DEVICE 1
TV (HITACHI)
DEVICE 2
TV (SONY)
Punch through
Punch through
Punch through
Punch through
Power on
Power off
Power on
Power off
Buttons
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
Switch inputs
q, e
Power on
Power off
Power on
Power off
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
–
q, e
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
–
q, e
Menu/guide
Cursor
Enter setting
Set up
Display
Switch channels
Channel selection
Switch inputs
q, e
Information
GSpecial RemarksH
qOnly one component can be preset for each mode. If a new code is preset, the previous code is automatically cleared.
eThe CD, VCR or DVD buttons (one only set) can be assigned to the monitor, satellite receiver and cable TV (vpage 65 “Punch Through
Function”).
EL Display
EL Display
Troubleshooting
[A ~ G], [d f],
[BAND],
[MODE],
[MEMO]
[ENTER]
[uiop]
[SEARCH]
[CH +/–]
[0 ~ 9]
[SHIFT]
Buttons
MODE SELECTOR
Device Mode
Device operated
A~G
d f
BAND
MODE
MEMO
TU
DEVICE 1
Analog tuner
Preset memory block selection
Tuning + / –
AM/FM switching
Switch search modes
Preset memory registration
u i o p
ENTER
–
–
DEVICE 2
XM
Preset memory block selection
Channel selection
–
–
Preset memory registration
Buttons
Category search
–
NET / DTU
DEVICE 1
DEVICE 2
NET / USB
HD Radio
Preset memory block selection
Preset memory block selection
–
Tuning + / –
–
AM/FM switching
–
Switch search modes
Preset memory registration
Preset memory registration
Cursor
Enter, Playback/Pause
Multicast switching (ui)
–
SEARCH
–
Direct search
Search
Multicast switching
CH + / –
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
0~9
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8)
SHIFT
Switch memory block
Preset channel selection
Preset channel selection
(1 ~ 8) /
Direct channel search
(0 ~ 9)
Switch memory block
Switch memory block
Switch memory block
63
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
17
2007/05/11
16:04:07
[
[MODE SELECTOR]
[ iPod]
DEVICE
1
(Analog
TUNER)
DEVICE
2
(XM)
1
(Default)
81001
52863
52864
2
82001
52795
3
83001
52800
4
84001
52805
Remote ID
DEVICE
1
(Net
Audio)
DEVICE
2
(HD
Radio)
72815
62865
62840
52812
72816
62837
62841
52813
72817
62838
62842
52814
72818
62839
62843
iPod
5
Point the main remote control units directly at each
other and press and hold the button on the other
device’s remote control unit that you want to learn.
Once learning is completed normally, the display lights and the
signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Other device’s
remote control unit
Setup
AMP
(MAIN)
NET/DTU
[RC SETUP]
AMP mode.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
[NUMBER] to
input the 5-digit number corresponding to the remote
ID to be changed.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
4
5
Press
set.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [5], in that order.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
Refer to the table at the right, and use
Press
4
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the learning
mode is set.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
is completed.
•With some remote control units, the signals cannot be learned or the
device will not operate properly even when the signals have been
learned. In this case, use the device’s own remote control unit.
•Learned buttons have priority over the preset memory. If you no
longer need the learned setting, reset the learning function (vpage
66).
NOTE
•[HOME] cannot be learned.
•Do not learn any remote control signals at [RC SETUP].
•The AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3, ZONE4 and SYSTEM CALL modes cannot
be learned.
Troubleshooting
Press [AMP] to set the main remote control unit to the
1
2
3
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
Information
When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same
room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver
operates.
6
Multi-Zone
If your AV devices are of a brand other than DENON or if
they cannot be operated with the preset memory function,
their remote control signals can be transfered to stored in
the AVR-4308CI’s main remote control unit.
Setting the Remote ID
1
2
3
Learning Function
bIf you want to learn other buttons, repeat steps 4 and 5.
bThe mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].
bThe signal transmission indicator lights once for a long time if
learning was not possible
Remote Control
[NUMBER]
AVR-4308CI’s main remote
control unit (RC-1068)
Playback
NOTE
•When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the
AVR-4308CI’s (vpage 36).
•When changing the AMP mode’s remote ID, also change the
“TUNER”, “iPod” and “NET/DTU” remote ID at the same time.
•Set the remote ID of an analog tuner for “TUNER” – “DEVICE1”, the
XM remote ID for “DEVICE2”.
Connections
[
AMP]
[
TU]
NET/DTU]
TUNER
Getting Started
MODE
SELECTOR
Signal transmission
indicator
Press the button to be set.
The main remote control unit’s display turns off.
bIf a button that cannot be learned is pressed, the signal transmission
indicator lights but the signal is not learned.
[TU], [iPod] or [NET/DTU] to select the mode to
be set.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the remote IDs for all
modes.
64
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
18
2007/05/11
16:04:08
Getting Started
Connections
Signal
transmission
indicator
[
AMP]
[MODE
SELECTOR]
[SYSTEM CALL]
[POWER ON]
Registering
1
2
3
Press
[
TV]
Setup
[8], [9],
[1],
[6], [7],
[3], [2]
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
register.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.
Playback
4
5
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the system
call registration mode is set.
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which you want to
[CHANNEL+/–]
Remote Control
[RC SETUP]
Multi-Zone
System Call Function
[NUMBER]
Information
Troubleshooting
This function lets you register a series of operations at a
single button.
For example, the amplifier can be turned on, the input
source selected, the monitor’s power turned on, the
source device’s power turned on and the play mode set all
by pressing a single button.
Up to 32 signals each can be registered at [SYSTEM CALL]
(1, 2 or 3).
register the signals.
Press the buttons you want to register in the same
sequence as the operations you want to perform.
The signal transmission indicator lights when a button is
pressed.
Example :Press [POWER ON].
↓
Press [MODE SELECTOR] – [DVD].
↓
Press [1].
bThe mode can be switched by pressing [MODE SELECTOR].
bPerform the registration procedure for all the buttons you want to
register.
6
Punch Through Function
CD, DVD or VCR mode buttons can be stored at unused TV
or SAT/CBL mode buttons.
For example, when DVD mode buttons are assigned to
the TV mode, the DVD mode operations can be performed
while in the TV mode.
1
2
3
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
punch through (CD, DVD or VCR).
Press
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the punch
through setting mode is set.
4
5
6
Press the button you want to punch through (1, 2,
6, 7, 8, 9 or 3).
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
punch through (TV or SAT/CBL).
Press
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
is completed.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the setting
is completed.
Calling out
1
2
Press [AMP], to select “SYSTEM CALL”.
Press
[SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) at which the signals
were registered.
The registered signals are transmitted in the registered
sequence.
Setting the Time the Backlight Stays Lit
1
2
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [3], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice and the backlight
on time setting mode is set.
3
Set the light on time.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
[Settable times] :[1] : 5 sec.
[2] : 10 sec. (Default)
[3] : 15 sec.
[4] : 20 sec.
[5] : 25 sec.
65
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
19
2007/05/11
16:04:09
The display’s brightness can be adjusted in 5 steps.
(Default: Step 3)
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [CHANNEL +] or [CHANNEL –].
The display gets one step brighter when [+] is pressed.
The display gets one step darker when [–] is pressed.
Resetting the Main Remote Control Unit
GResetting button by buttonH
reset.
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes 4 times.
All the settings are restored to their defaults.
Press [SYSTEM CALL] (1, 2 or 3) you want to reset.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Punch-through function
Press [MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
reset (TV or SAT/CBL).
1
2
3
4
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [8] and [4], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Information
Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.
Press [9], [8] and [1], in that order.
Multi-Zone
1
2
3
4
Press
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Remote Control
Learning Function
Press [9], [7] and [8], in that order.
1
2
Playback
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Setup
3
Press [RC SETUP] to complete the setting.
1
2
3
4
All settings
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
Connections
1
2
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
System call function
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press the button you want to reset twice.
Troubleshooting
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
GResetting by device modeH
1
2
3
4
Press
reset.
Getting Started
Adjusting the Backlight’s Brightness
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
Press and hold in [RC SETUP] for at least 3 seconds.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press [9], [7] and [6], in that order.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
Press
[MODE SELECTOR] for the device you want to
reset twice.
The signal transmission indicator flashes twice.
66
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
20
2007/05/11
16:04:10
Getting Started
Sub Remote Control Unit Operations
Connections
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
•The sub remote control unit is equipped with frequently
used buttons, so it can be used for simple remote control
unit operations.
•The sub remote control unit can also be used for multizone, so you can use it to control the AVR-4308CI from
other rooms.
•The operations listed below can be performed with the
sub remote control unit.
•Switching the input source
•Adjusting the volume
•Tuner (AM/FM), XM, HD Radio and iPod operations
•NET/USB direct play
•GUI menu and ZONE2 on-screen display operations
•Zone power on/off
•It is not possible to operate devices other than the
amplifier.
Multi-Zone
[ZONE OFF]
[ZONE SELECT]
[ZONE ON]
Information
[SOURCE SELECT]
Troubleshooting
[CHANNEL +/–]
[MUTE]
[MENU]
[uiop]
[SEARCH]
[REPEAT]
[RANDOM]
[VOLUME +/–]
[SHIFT]
[ENTER]
[RETURN]
[8 9], [2], [1/3],
[TUNING d f]
[ALL MUSIC], [FAVORITES]
[USB]
Functions of Buttons by Component
Zone selection
ZONE SELECT
ZONE OFF
ZONE ON
SOURCE SELECT
CHANNEL + / –
DVD, HDP, TV / CBL, DVR1, VCR, V.AUX,
SAT, CD, PHONO
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection (b2)
–
SHIFT
–
Device operated
VOLUME + / –
MUTE
MENU
u i o p
SEARCH
8 9,
TUNING d f
USB
ALL MUSIC *
(Music server only)
FAVORITES *
Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
–
–
–
–
–
TUNER
(AM/FM)
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
Preset channel selection
–
Preset channel memory
–
block selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
–
–
DTU
(HD Radio)
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
Preset channel selection
–
Preset channel memory
–
block selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
–
Multicast switching (u i)
Multicast switching
–
Tuning
–
Tuning
–
b3
–
b3
–
b3
–
b4
–
b4
–
b4
–
b5
–
b5
–
b5
–
b1:Affects the currently selected zone.
b2:In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
b3:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played.
b4:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music server are played.
b5:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.
*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 40).
DIRECT PLAY button
•Playback is possible in the mode selected at GUI menu “Source Select” – “NET/USB” – “Playback Mode” – “Direct Play”.
FAVORITES: Playback starts from the first track registered in the favorites.
ALL MUSIC: Playback starts from the first track registered in the “All Music” folder.
•When [USB] is pressed, playback starts from the first track on the USB memory device.
NOTE
When the music server is stopped or restarted, it may no longer be possible to play tracks stored in the favorites.
67
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
21
2007/05/11
16:04:10
SHIFT
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection (b2)
Preset channel selection
Preset channel memory block
selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
File operations
–
File operations
–
RETURN
8 9,
TUNING d f
2
1/3
REPEAT
RANDOM
USB
ALL MUSIC *
(Music server only)
FAVORITES *
–
File operations
–
Channel selection
–
Track search
Track search
–
b3
–
Stop
Play/pause
1-track/All-track repeat play (USB)
1-track random play (USB)
b3
Stop
Play/pause
1-track/All-track repeat play
1-track/album shuffle play
b3
–
–
–
–
–
b4
–
b4
b4
–
b5
–
b5
b5
–
–
–
–
–
Troubleshooting
–
–
–
–
Information
Page forward
screen /
Character search
Adjustment of volume (b1)
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
File operations
–
File operations
–
Page forward
screen /
Browse/Remote
–
mode switching
(press and hold)
–
Multi-Zone
–
–
Remote Control
SEARCH
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
–
Playback
M
Z2
Z3
Z4
Zone operation mode selection
Power turned off (b1)
Power turned on (b1)
Input source selection
–
Preset channel selection
–
Preset channel memory
–
block selection
–
Adjustment of volume (b1)
–
Muting (b1)
Selected zone menu
–
Category search
–
–
iPod
Setup
VOLUME + / –
MUTE
MENU
u i o p
ENTER
NET / USB
Connections
Zone selection
ZONE SELECT
ZONE OFF
ZONE ON
SOURCE SELECT
CHANNEL + / –
SAT TU
(XM)
Getting Started
Device operated
b1:Affects the currently selected zone.
b2:In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
b3:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files on the USB memory device are played.
b4:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “All Music” on the music server are played.
b5:The input source switches to “NET/USB” and the files in “Favorites” are played.
*: Whether “All Music” or “Favorites” is selected depends on the “Direct Play” setting (vpage 40).
68
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
22
2007/05/11
16:04:11
Getting Started
Multi-zone
indicator
[ZONE SELECT]
[ADVANCED SETUP]
Connections
[ZONE OFF]
Setting the Zone for Which the Sub
Remote Control Unit is Used (ZONE
SELECT LOCK Mode)
We recommend always using the sub remote control unit
for the same room. When this is done, the unit can be
set so that the zone does not switch when buttons are
operated.
1
2
Setting the Remote ID
When using multiple DENON AV receivers in the same
room, make this setting so that no AV receiver other than
the desired one operates.
1
While pressing
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
Setup
All the multi-zone indicators light.
Select the multi-zone to be set.
Playback
[MENU]
The selected multi-zone indicator lights.
Remote Control
qTo set to “MAIN ZONE”: Press [REPEAT].
wTo set to “ZONE2”
: Press [RANDOM].
eTo set to “ZONE3”
: Press [USB].
rTo set to “ZONE4”
: Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].
[RANDOM]
[REPEAT]
[ALL MUSIC/FAVORITE]
Multi-Zone
[USB]
3
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
To Cancel
Information
Troubleshooting
1
2
3
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
Press [ZONE SELECT].
Switching Zones
Use this procedure to select the zone to be operated by
the sub remote control unit.
1 [ZONE SELECT]
2 SELECT]
Press
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
.
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
While the multi-zone indicator is light, press
to select the zone to be operated.
[ZONE
All the multi-zone indicators light.
Use the tip of a pen to press [ADVANCED SETUP].
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
[MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
with the tip of a pen.
The multi-zone indicator corresponding to the currently selected
remote ID flashes.
2
Select the remote ID to be set.
3
While pressing
qTo set to 1: Press [REPEAT].
The “M” indicator flashes.
wTo set to 2: Press [RANDOM].
The “Z2” indicator flashes.
eTo set to 3: Press [USB].
The “Z3” indicator flashes.
rTo set to 4: Press [ALL MUSIC/FAVORITES].
The “Z4” indicator flashes.
[MENU], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
with the tip of a pen.
The multi-zone indicator turns off.
NOTE
When changing a setting, be sure to set the same remote ID as the
AVR-4308CI’s (vpage 36).
Resetting the Settings
While pressing [ZONE OFF], press [ADVANCED SETUP]
with the tip of a pen.
All the multi-zone indicators flash 4 times, then all the settings are
restored to their defaults.
The currently selected multi-zone indicator lights.
69
3.AVR4308_P47~69.indd
23
2007/05/11
16:04:12
Getting Started
Amp Assign / Multi Zone Connections and Operations
NOTE
•For bi-amp and bi-wiring playback, use speakers compatible with that type of connection.
•When conducting bi-amp or bi-wiring playback, remove the short-circuiting boards (or wires) from the
speaker terminals.
Setup
Multi-Zone Settings with the Amp Assign Function
Playback
The amp assign function lets you assign the amplifiers for the different channels built into the AVR-4308CI to the speaker outputs for the different zones.
Select the desired playback environment from among “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, then set the corresponding “Amp Assign” mode at GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Amp Assign” (vpage 35).
Connect the speakers as described at “Amp Assign mode settings and speakers connected to the various speaker terminals”.
Setting 1 : With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.
Setting 2:
bi-amp connections for
the FL and FR channels in the
main zone and conducting 5.1channel playback
and bi-wiring playback using speakers
exclusively for 2-channel playback
Switching·················Surround Mode switching
L
C
R
FL
Surround Mode
SW
DIRECT / STEREO
SR-A
Multi Channel /
Surround
SL-A
C
FR
2ch
Bi-Amp
or
2ch
Bi-Wiring
SBL
SBR
R
Amp Assign
mode:
For 2-channel
bi-amp
playback
SR-A
SL
2ch Bi-Wiring
Amp Assign mode
7.1CH
FRONT
R
L
FR
FL
CENTER
SURR-A
R
C
L
SURR.
BACK
R
L
SR-A SL-A SBR SBL
2ch Bi-Amp
FR
2ch Bi-Wiring
FL
C
SR-A SL-A SBR SBL
SURR-B/
AMP ASSIGN
R
A
B
nAmp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Main zone
FL SW
C
Main zone
FL SW
FR
C
FR
2ch Bi-Amp
For 2-channel
bi-wiring
playback
SBR
(switching with other modes not possible)
L
AMP ASSIGN
-2
R
L
–
–
–
–
R
L
R
L
2ch L/R Bi-Amp connection
R
L
R
L
2ch L/R Bi-Wiring connection
5.1ch
FL/FR
Bi-Amp
Amp Assign mode:
SR
SL
Bi-Amp
A
B
Both A and B can be installed
for SR and SL.
7.1ch
FL/FR
Bi-Wiring
A
A
B
B
SBL
Amp Assign mode:
SR
SBR
Bi-Wiring
Both A and B can be installed
for SR and SL.
Troubleshooting
7.1ch
SL-A
SBL
SW
L
bi-wiring connections
for the FL and FR channels in the
main zone and conducting 7.1channel playback
(switching with other modes not possible)
Main zone
FR
FMaking
Information
FL
Setting 3:
FMaking
Multi-Zone
F7.1-channel playback
FSwitching between bi-amp
Remote Control
With “Setting 4” to “Setting 6”, it is possible to switch the Amp Assign mode between the 7.1-channel mode and the multizone mode without changing the speaker connections.
Main zone
Connections
The AVR-4308CI is compatible with the following types of playback:
•Multi-zone playback (ZONE2 & ZONE3)
•Bi-amp playback (front speaker)
•Bi-wiring playback (front speaker)
nAmp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Amp Assign mode
FRONT
R
CENTER
L
SURR-A
SURR.
BACK
R
R
L
R
L
–
–
SR-B
SL-B
SR-B
SL-B
L
Bi-Amp
FR
Bi-Wiring
FL
C
SURR-B/
AMP ASSIGN
SR-A SL-A
SBR SBL
AMP ASSIGN
-2
R
FR
L
FL
FL/FR Bi-Amp
connection
FR
FL
FL/FR Bi-Wiring
connection
70
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
1
2007/05/11
16:04:50
Getting Started
Setting 4 : With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.
Connections
F7.1-channel playback
FMulti-zone playback
•5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback with bi-wiring connections
•5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback with bi-wiring
connections
Switching·················ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button
Setting 5 : With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.
F7.1-channel playback
FMulti-zone playback
•5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 or ZONE3 stereo playback
•5.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback
Switching·················ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button
Main zone
Main zone
FL SW
Setup
Playback
SL-A
C
Main zone
FL SW
FR
7.1ch
FL/FR
Bi-Wiring
SR-A
ZONE2
FR
+
ZONE2 & 3
POWER
“ON”
C
SL-A
5.1ch
FL/FR
Bi-Wiring
SR-A
+
Z2L
Remote Control
SBL
SBR
Multi-Zone
Both A and B can be installed
for SR and SL.
Z2R
Z3L
Z3R
Stereo
Z2L
Z2R
Z3L
Z3R
Stereo
“OFF”
+
ZONE3
Z2
Z3
Mono
Mono
Amp Assign
mode:
FL SW
Bi-Wiring &
ZONE2
Bi-Wiring &
ZONE (MONO)
Information
Amp Assign mode
Troubleshooting
7.1CH
Bi-Wiring
FRONT
R
FR
CENTER
L
FL
SURR-A
R
C
L
SURR.
BACK
R
L
SR-A SL-A SBR SBL
Bi-Wiring & ZONE2
Bi-Wiring & ZONE3
Bi-Wiring & ZONE
(MONO)
FR
FL
C
SR-A SL-A
–
A
B
B
“ON”
–
SURR-B/
AMP ASSIGN-2
AMP ASSIGN
R
L
FR
FL
FL/FR
Bi-Wiring
connection
FR
FL
FL/FR
Bi-Wiring
connection
R
L
ZONE2
FR
5.1ch
SL
“OFF”
SR
A
A
B
B
+
+
SBR
Both A and B can be installed
for SR and SL.
Both A and B can be installed
for SR and SL.
nAmp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
SR
C
+
ZONE2 & 3
POWER
A
SBL
Main zone
FL SW
FR
7.1ch
SL
Bi-Wiring &
ZONE3
C
Z2L
Amp Assign
mode:
ZONE2
ZONE3
Z2R
Z3L
Z3R
Z3L
Z3R
Stereo
Z2L
Z2R
ZONE3
Stereo
Z2
Z3
Mono
Mono
ZONE (MONO)
Both A and B can be installed
for SR and SL.
nAmp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Speaker terminal
Amp Assign mode
7.1CH
FRONT
R
L
FR
FL
CENTER
C
SURR-A
SURR.
BACK
R
R
L
L
SR-A SL-A SBR SBL
SURR-B/
AMP ASSIGN-2
AMP ASSIGN
R
L
SR-B
SL-B
ZONE2
–
–
Z2R
Z2L
Z3R
Z3L
ZONE3
ZONE (MONO)
FR
FL
C
SR-A SL-A
–
–
SR-B
SL-B
R
L
–
–
Z2R
Z2L
Z3R
Z3L
Z3
Z2
(MONO) (MONO)
Z3
Z2
(MONO) (MONO)
71
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
2
2007/05/11
16:04:51
Main zone
FL SW
C
Main zone
FL SW
FR
“ON”
+
“OFF”
Z2R
Z3L
Z3R
Stereo
Stereo
Z2
Z3
Mono
Mono
ZONE2/3
(MONO)
Audio signals
Connectors for video output
ZONE2
ZONE2 PRE OUT
Stereo
ZONE2 VIDEO OUT,
ZONE2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
ZONE3
ZONE3 PRE OUT
Stereo
–
ZONE4
ZONE4 OPTICAL3 OUT
Bit-stream
–
MAIN ZONE (7.1-channel system)
Monitor
ZONE2
ZONE4
Monitor
SBR
'-
48
'3
'-
nAmp Assign mode setting and speakers connected to the various speaker
terminals
Amp Assign mode
ZONE2/3(MONO)
R
L
FR
FL
FR
FL
CENTER
C
C
SURR-A
R
R
L
L
SR-A SL-A SBR SBL
–
–
–
–
SURR-B/
AMP ASSIGN-2
AMP ASSIGN
R
L
R
L
–
–
–
–
Z3R
Z3L
Z2R
Z2L
Z3 (MONO)
ZONE2 audio
output
43
4-
Remote
control unit
4#
-
43
4-
ZONE3
Power amplifier
4#
3
ZONE3 audio output
ZONE4
digital output
: Multi-zone video cable
: Multi-zone audio cable
Z2 (MONO)
•When only using one speaker for ZONE2 or ZONE3, set to “Mono”. In this case, the ZONE2 (ZONE3)
monaural output is output from the ZONE2 (ZONE3) pre-out L and R connectors, so connect as desired.
•Separate power amplifiers are needed for ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Troubleshooting
7.1CH
ZONE2/3
FRONT
SURR.
BACK
AV amplifier
AVR-4308CI ZONE2 video
output
Input
'3
Information
Speaker terminal
DVD player
$
Multi-Zone
•When the ZONE2 ON/OFF button is set to “ON” and the ZONE3 ON/OFF button is set to “OFF”, the main zone
is set to 5.1-channel playback.
•When the ZONE3 ON/OFF button is set to “ON”, the main zone is set to 3.1-channel playback.
48
Power amplifier
$
Remote Control
SBL
Amp Assign
mode:
ZONE2/3
ZONE3
Connectors for audio output
Playback
SR-A
3.1ch
Z2L
Prepare power amplifiers for ZONE2 and ZONE3, an amplifier that is compatible with bit-stream input for
ZONE4.
Setup
SL-A
ZONE2
FR
+
ZONE2 & 3
POWER
7.1ch
C
Multi-Zone Settings and Operations with Zone Pre-out
Output
Connections
F7.1-channel playback
FMulti-zone playback
•3.1-channel playback + ZONE2 stereo playback + ZONE3 stereo playback
•3.1-channel playback + ZONE2 monaural playback + ZONE3 monaural playback
Switching·················ZONE2 ON/OFF button, ZONE3 ON/OFF button
Getting Started
Setting 6 : With this setting it is possible to switch between the following two playback modes.
72
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
3
2007/05/11
16:04:52
Getting Started
Multi-Zone Operations
<SOURCE SELECT>
<VOLUME>
Turning the Power On and Off
Connections
GOperation on the main unitH
Press <ZONE2 ON/OFF>, <ZONE3 ON/OFF> or <ZONE4 ON/OFF> for the zone
to be operated.
When the power turns on, the multi-zone indicator lights on the
display.
Setup
GOperation on the main remote control unitH
Playback
<ZONE4 ON/OFF>
<ZONE2 ON/OFF>
<ZONE2/3/4/ REC SELECT> <ZONE3 ON/OFF>
q Press [AMP] and select the zone mode to be operated.
w Press [Z2 ON] (ZONE2 mode), [OFF] or [ON] (ZONE3 or ZONE4
mode).
Remote Control
Selecting the Input Source
GOperation on the main unitH
q Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted.
w Turn <SOURCE SELECT>.
[
AMP]
GOperation on the main remote control unitH
Multi-Zone
In the zone mode you want to operate, press [SOURCE SELECT].
[Z2 ON]
Information
[Z2 OFF]
[ON]
[OFF]
(ZONE3 or
ZONE4 mode)
Adjusting the Volume
GOperation on the main unitH
q Press <ZONE2/3/4 / REC SELECT> and select the zone to be adjusted.
w Turn <VOLUME> to adjust.
Troubleshooting
GOperation on the main remote control unitH
In the zone mode whose volume you want to adjust, press [VOLUME].
[VOLUME]
[MUTE]
[SOURCE
SELECT]
About the button names in these explanations
< > : Buttons on the main unit
[
] : Buttons on the remote control unit
Button name only:
Buttons on the main unit and remote control unit
[Variable range]
–––
–70dB ~ –40dB ~ +18dB
•The volume can be adjusted when GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Volume Level” is set to
“Variable”. The volume can be increased up to the value set at
GUI menu “Manual Setup” – “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)”
– “Volume Limit” (vpage 34).
•The volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 can be adjusted with the remote
control unit.
Turning off the Sound Temporarily
In the zone mode for which you want to mute the sound, press
[MUTE].
The sound is reduced to the level set at GUI menu “Manual Setup”
– “Zone Setup” – “(select the zone)” – “Mute Level” (vpage 34).
To cancel, either adjust the volume or press [MUTE] again.
The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.
•The source selected for ZONE2 is also output from the recording
output connectors.
•For ZONE2, the “Zone Setup” can be made while watching the onscreen display. Also, when ZONE3 is operated, the on-screen display
appears on the ZONE2 monitor, so operation can be performed
watching this on-screen display.
ZONE2 MENU
ZONE2 MENU
INPUT :DVD
SIGNAL:ANALOG
VOL. :-40.0dB
Bass
Treble
HPF
Lch Lev.
Rch Lev.
0dB
0dB
OFF
0dB
0dB
Channel
Vol.Lev.
Vol.Limit
P.On Lev.
Mute Lev.
STEREO
VAR
OFF
LAST
FULL
NOTE
•When connected to the component video output connectors, the
on-screen display is not displayed.
•When the input source to which the digital input connectors
(OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3,
playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM
(2-channel) format.
•Digital audio signals input from the DENON LINK or HDMI connectors
cannot be played in multi-zone.
•In ZONE4, it is not possible to select “XM”, “HD Radio”, or sources
with no digital input signals (“TUNER”, “PHONO”, “iPod”, etc.).
Network audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) can be
played as long as they are not copyright-protected.
•When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output
from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.
•When “DENON LINK” is assigned at the GUI menu “Assign” setting,
the PCM signals, network audio signals (Internet radio, music server
and USB), XM signals and HD Radio signals input from the digital
input connectors cannot be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3
audio output connectors.
73
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
4
2007/05/11
16:04:53
We recommend installing the speakers for the surround “L” and “R”
channels a bit forward.
Path of the surround sound from the
speakers to the listening position
We recommend using 2 speakers.
When using dipolar speakers in particular, be sure to use 2 speakers.
Other Information
About Speaker Installation
Surround back speakers
48
$
'3
Below we introduce examples of speaker layouts. Refer to these to
arrange your speakers according to their type and how you want to
use them.
qWhen mainly playing movies
Recommended when your surround speakers are single or 2-way
speakers.
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
$
'3
Point slightly
downwards
60°
Surround back speakers
GAs seen from aboveH
4-DI
43DI
Monitor
Subwoofer
45° ~ 60°
Surround
speaker A
Surround
speaker A
120°
Surround back
speaker
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
GAs seen from the sideH
Point slightly
downwards
Troubleshooting
48
Surround back
speaker
Information
'-
Multi-Zone
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 6.1-channel systems
GAs seen from the sideH
Front speakers
Center speaker
Surround
speaker
Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL
Surround back speakers
eWhen playing movies and music
60°
Surround
speakers
Point slightly
downwards
60°
GAs seen from aboveH
Monitor
Subwoofer
43DI
Surround back
speaker
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
G1H Using surround back speaker(s)
Front speakers
Center speaker
4-DI
Surround
speaker
Surround
speakers
Remote Control
'-
Examples of speaker layouts
Playback
Change of positioning and acoustic image
with 5.1-channel systems
Setup
Sound positioning directly to the rear can be achieved easily by adding
a surround back speaker to a 5.1-channel system.
In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the
rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround
signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the
front to the point directly behind the listening position.
Connections
Placement of the surround left and right channels
when using surround back speakers
wSetting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type
speakers for the surround speakers
For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse
radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide
a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating
speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the
prime listening position, mounted above ear level.
Getting Started
Number of surround back speakers
Surround
speaker B
Surround back
speaker
Surround speaker B
GAs seen from aboveH
GAs seen from the sideH
4#DI
Movement of acoustic image from
SR to SB to SL
In addition to sources recorded in 6.1-channels, the surround effect of
conventional 2- to 5.1-channel sources can also be enhanced.
74
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
5
2007/05/11
16:04:55
Getting Started
G2H When not using surround back speakers
Front speakers
Center speaker
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce
the sound of the studio master.
This format is compatible with a maximum sampling frequency of 96
kHz and up to 7.1-channels, so it is used for applications particularly
prioritizing sound quality.
Connections
Monitor
Subwoofer
60°
Surround speaker
Setup
Front speaker
2 to 3 feet /
60 to 90 cm
Playback
120°
Surround speakers
Remote Control
GAs seen from aboveH
Dolby TrueHD
GAs seen from the sideH
Surround
Multi-Zone
The AVR-4308CI is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit
that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve
the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.
Dolby Surround
Information
Dolby Digital
Troubleshooting
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL” , “FR” and
“C”), 2 surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for
low frequencies.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved.
A real, overpowering sense of presence is achieved when playing
movie sources in AV rooms as well.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It
is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers
greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions
of the playback equipment.
DTS Surround
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up
to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
Dolby Pro Logic g
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into 5-channels to
achieve an excellent surround effect.
The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band
signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater)
to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of
presence for all stereo sources.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the
conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible
with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels
of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides
high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional
products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel
data.
Dolby Pro Logic gx
Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic
g matrix decoding technology.
Audio signals recorded in 2-channels are decoded to achieve a natural
sound with up to 7.1-channels.
There are 3 modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Cinema”
suited for playing movies, and “Game” which is optimized for playing
games.
bSources recorded in Dolby Surround
Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the following
logo marks.
Dolby Surround support mark :
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is DTS, Inc’s lossless audio format compatible
with up to 96 kHz/7.1-channels. The lossless audio coding technology
faithfully reproduces the sound of the studio master. It is fully
compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS
digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround
sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel
audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.
DTS NEO:6™ Surround
DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS
NEO:6 CINEMA” suited for playing movies and “DTS NEO:6 MUSIC”
suited for playing music.
75
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
6
2007/05/11
16:04:56
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality
playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24
bit quantization on DVD-Video.
Information
Troubleshooting
®, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and
Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from
Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more
of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074, 5,640,161,
5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311, 5,872,531, and in
Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.
Multi-Zone
HDCD® is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces
the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining
compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the
dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.
Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified
automatically to select the optimum digital processing.
Equipped with “Advanced AL24 Processing” time axis region
information volume expansion
In addition to the existing “AL24 Processing Plus” bit expansion
technology, DENON has also developed “Advanced AL24 Processing”
that dramatically improves information volume in the time axis region
using high-speed signal detection and processing technology. In
addition to expanding original 16-bit digital data to 24 bits, “Advanced
AL24 Processing” uses data interpolation along the time axis or upconverted sampling to achieve natural interpolation without losing the
original data. A digital filter is used to further expand adaptability and
perform optimum filtering calculations for ringing-free pulse response,
pulsive music data and attack sounds.
This results in the reproduction of such spatial information as the
delicate nuances in the music, the positions of the performers, and
the breadth, height, and depth of the concert hall. “Advanced AL24
Processing” is conducted for all channels and modes other than DSD
DIRECT.
Remote Control
This product is manufactured under license from Neural Audio
Corporation.
D&M Holdings Inc. hereby grants the user a non-exclusive,
nontransferable, limited license right exercisable to use the NA
SURROUND Technology and other US and World Wide Patents
Pending technology.
“Neural” and “Neural Audio” and “Neural Surround” Are
trademarks of Neural Audio Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
HDCD®
(High Definition Compatible Digital®)
Advanced AL24 Processing Multi
channel
Playback
Neural Surround™, a breakthrough in audio technology, will bring the
excitement of surround music to more of America’s listening audience.
It provides the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround
sound in a format 100 % compatible with stereo. With superior
spectral resolution and channel separation, Neural Surround™ draws
the brain’s attention to sonic details in musical instruments, vocals,
and ambience that are typically masked by other playback systems.
This allows the listener to fully experience the richness and subtleties
in recorded performance as never before. As the chosen format for XM
Satellite Radio’s new XM HD surround programming, Neural Surround
will help deliver more surround music to more listeners than any other
broadcast format. XM Satellite Radio will be the first radio company to
broadcast surround sound on the radio 24 hours a day and will offer
three channels fully dedicated to Neural Surround™ music. This alone
will amount to more than 25,000 hours of Neural Surround™ music
each year.
Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. It is
licensed under US and National Patent Applications 20030235318
and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign Patents pending.
MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are trademarks of
Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.. All rights reserved.
DENON LINK is a unique digital, balanced transfer type interface
developed by DENON. It offers high speed, high quality transfer of
digital audio data with low signal loss. It can be used together with
DENON DVD players equipped with a special DENON Link connector
using a single cable to enable playback with high sound quality.
It allows digital transfer of the 192 kHz/24 bit 2-channel digital signals
of DVD-Audio discs, PCM multi-channel signals, etc. Full-spec digital
transfer of the audio contents of Super Audio CDs is possible by
connecting a player equipped for DENON LINK 3rd Edition.
Setup
Neural Surround
Audyssey MultEQ XT is a technology designed to provide the optimum
listening environment for multiple listeners within the listening
area. Test data collected from multiple listening points is analyzed
comprehensively and equalization that improves the sound quality for
the entire listening area is performed.
Audyssey MultEQ XT not only corrects frequency response problems
in large listening areas, it also fully automates the surround system
setup.
For a detailed description, see page 25.
DENON LINK
Connections
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-HD
Master Audio are trademarks of DTS, Inc.© 1996-2007 DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Audyssey MultEQ XT
Getting Started
DTS 96/24
76
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
7
2007/05/11
16:04:56
Getting Started
HDMI
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Connections
Setup
HDMI is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs based
on DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standards and optimized for use in
consumer equipment.
Non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals are
transmitted with a single connection.
HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Contents
Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital
video signals in the same was as with DVI.
Deep Color
Playback
Remote Control
Eliminates on-screen color banding, for smooth tonal transitions and
subtle gradations between colors.
Enables increased contrast ratio.
Can represent many times more shades of gray between black and
white.
At 30-bit pixel depth, a four times improvement would be the minimum,
and the typical improvement would be eight times or more.
xvYCC
Multi-Zone
Next-generation “xvYCC” color space supports 1.8 times as many
colors as existing HDTV signals.
Lets HDTVs display colors more accurately.
Enables displays with natural, vivid colors.
Information
Lip Sync
Troubleshooting
Because consumer electronics devices are using increasingly
complex digital signal processing to enhance the clarity and detail of
the content, synchronization of video and audio in user devices has
become a greater challenge and could potentially require complex enduser adjustments. HDMI 1.3 incorporates an automatic video/audio
synching capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization
automatically with total accuracy.
“HDMI”, “HDMI logo” and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface”
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC.
Surround Modes and Parameters
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Channel output
Surround Mode
Front L/R
Center
Surround
L/R
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
Surround
Back L/R
Su­b­­­­woofer
D. COMP
LFE
z1
AFDM
z2
z1
SB CH Out Cinema EQ.
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
S
A
A
A
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
A
A
DSD DIRECT
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DSD MULTI DIRECT
S
D
D
D
D
A
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
MULTI CH DIRECT
S
D
D
D
D
A
S( 0 dB)
S (ON)
S
A
STEREO
S
A
A
A
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
A
A
EXT. IN
S
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
MULTI CH IN
S
D
D
D
D
A
S( 0 dB)
S (ON)
S
A
WIDE SCREEN
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
S (OFF)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
A
S
S(NOTE1)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
S
D
D
A
D
S (OFF)
A
A
S
S(NOTE2)
S(NOTE1)
DTS NEO:6
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
A
A
S
DOLBY DIGITAL
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
DTS SURROUND
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
S (ON)
S
S (OFF)
neural
S
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
S
A
7CH STEREO
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
SUPER STADIUM
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
ROCK ARENA
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
JAZZ CLUB
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
CLASSIC CONCERT
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
MONO MOVIE
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
VIDEO GAME
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
MATRIX
S
D
D
D
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
VIRTURL
S
A
A
A
D
S (OFF)
S( 0 dB)
A
S
A
S: Signal / Adjustable
A : No signal / Not adjustable
D:Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
S: Enable
A : Unable
NOTE1 :This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter”
– “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to
“Cinema” (vpage 42).
NOTE2 :This parameter is availabe when the GUI menu “Parameter”
– “Audio” – “Surround Parameters” – “Mode” is set to
“Cinema” or “Pro Logic” (vpage 42).
NOTE:
z1 :When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
z2 :When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and Super
Audio CD.
77
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
8
2007/05/11
16:04:56
Surround Mode
Mode
Room Size
Effect Level
Delay Time
Subwoofer
PRO LOGIC g/gx MUSIC mode only
Panorama
Dimension
Center Width
NEO:6 MUSIC
mode only
EXT. IN only
Tone
Night Mode
Room EQ
RESTORER
Center Image Subwoofer Att.
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (OFF)
S (NOTE5)
S (OFF)
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (NOTE5)
A
DSD MULTI DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (NOTE5)
A
MULTI CH DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
STEREO
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
EXT. IN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
A
MULTI CH IN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
WIDE SCREEN
A
A
S (ON, 10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx
S (Cinema)
A
A
A
A
S (OFF)
S (3)
S (3)
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g
S (Cinema)
A
A
A
A
S (OFF)
S (3)
S (3)
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
DTS NEO:6
S (Cinema)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S (0.3)
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
DOLBY DIGITAL
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
DTS SURROUND
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
A
neural
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
7CH STEREO
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
SUPER STADIUM
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(NOTE3)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
ROCK ARENA
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(NOTE4)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
JAZZ CLUB
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
CLASSIC CONCERT
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
MONO MOVIE
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
VIDEO GAME
A
S (Medium)
S (10)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
MATRIX
A
A
A
S (30 msec)
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
VIRTURL
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S(0 dB)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
S (OFF)
Remote Control
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
S: Adjustable
A : Not adjustable
NOTE3 :BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB
NOTE4 :BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB
NOTE5 : Can be used according to the “Direct Mode” setting.
Playback
S: Signal / Adjustable
A : No signal / Not adjustable
D:Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting
Setup
A
DSD DIRECT
Connections
PURE DIRECT, DIRECT
Getting Started
Signals and adjustability in the different modes
Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)
78
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
9
2007/05/11
16:04:58
Getting Started
Differences in Surround Mode Names Depending on the Input Signals
Input signals
Button
Connections
Surround mode
Note
WMA
(Windows
LINEAR
Media Audio)
ANALOG PCM /
/ MP3 /
WAV
MPEG-4
AAC / FLAC
DTS
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DVD-AUDIO
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY DOLBY
DVDDIGITAL EX
DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL Audio
(With no
(5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch)
(2ch) (multi ch)
Flag)
Super Audio CD
DVDAudio
(2ch)
DSD
(multi ch)
DSD
(2ch)
STANDARD
DTS SURROUND
Setup
DTS ES DSCRT6.1
z1
A
A
A
F D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS ES MTRX6.1
z1
A
A
A
A
F D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Playback
DTS SURROUND
A
A
A
S
S
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS 96/24
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Remote Control
DTS + PLgx CINEMA
z2
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS + NEO:6
z1
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
DTS NEO:6 CINEMA
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
F
F
F
A
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY SURROUND
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
z1
Multi-Zone
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx CINEMA
z2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F D
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx CINEMA
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
S
A
S
Information
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g CINEMA
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
Troubleshooting
DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
neural
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
A
F
A
MULTI IN + PLgx CINEMA
z2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
MULTI CH IN 7.1
NOTE:
z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”
.
z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”
.
F : Mode selectable in initial status
D : Mode fixed when “AFDM” is “ON”
S : Selectable mode
A : Non-selectable mode
79
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
10
2007/05/11
16:04:59
Surround mode
Note
DTS
DOLBY DIGITAL
DTS ES
DSCRT
(With Flag)
DTS ES
MTRX
(With Flag)
DTS
(5.1ch)
DTS
96/24
DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
(With Flag)
DVD-AUDIO
DOLBY
DOLBY
DOLBY DOLBY
DIGITAL EX
DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL
(With no
(5.1/5/4ch) (4/3ch)
(2ch)
Flag)
Super Audio CD
DVDAudio
(multi
ch)
DVDAudio
(2ch)
DSD
(multi
ch)
DSD
(2ch)
DIRECT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
A
DSD DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
DSD MULTI DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
MULTI CH DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
Setup
DIRECT
z2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
M DIRECT + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
PURE DIRECT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
A
DSD PURE DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
DSD MULTI PURE
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
MULTI CH PURE DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
Playback
M DIRECT + PLgx CINEMA
M DIRECT 7.1
PURE DIRECT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
M PURE D + PLgx MUSIC
z1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
M CH PURE DIRECT 7.1
DSP SIMULATION
7CH STEREO
z3
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SUPER STADIUM
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
ROCK ARENA
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
JAZZ CLUB
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
CLASSIC CONCERT
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MONO MOVIE
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
VIDEO GAME
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
MATRIX
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
VIRTUAL
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
F
F
F
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
F
S
F
STEREO
STEREO
Troubleshooting
S
S
Information
S
WIDE SCREEN
Multi-Zone
z2
Remote Control
M PURE D + PLgx CINEMA
Connections
WMA
(Windows
LINEAR
Media Audio)
ANALOG PCM /
/ MP3 /
WAV
MPEG-4
AAC / FLAC
Getting Started
Input signals
Button
NOTE :
z1: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”
.
z2: This mode is not available when the surround back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”
.
z3: If the surround back speaker setup is set to “None”
, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.
F : Mode selectable in initial status
S : Selectable mode
A : Non-selectable mode
80
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
11
2007/05/11
16:05:00
Getting Started
About Networks
Windows Media Player Ver.11
Connections
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft
Corporation.
It can be used to play playlists created with Windows Media Player
Ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3
and WAV.
Setup
Playback
vTuner
Remote Control
This is a free online contents server for Internet radio. Note that usage
fees are included in upgrade costs.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com
Multi-Zone
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license
from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized
subsidiary.
Windows Media DRM
A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.
•Windows Vista and the Windows logo are trademarks of the
Microsoft group of companies.
•The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
•Content providers are using the digital rights management technology
for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect
the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual
property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WMDRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this
device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure
Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM
Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play
Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s
ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM
Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license
for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may,
in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto
your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
About Wireless LAN
Information
DLNA
Troubleshooting
•DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance.
•Some contents may not be compatible with other DLNA CERTIFIED™
products.
Wi-Fi®
Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the
Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN
devices.
IEEE 802.11b
This is one wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group
that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States. It uses the
2.4 GHz band usable freely without a radio frequency license (ISM
band), enabling communications at a maximum speed of 11 Mbps.
IEEE 802.11g
This is another wireless LAN standard set by the 802 working group
that establishes LAN technology standards at the IEEE (Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers) of the United States, and is
compatible with IEEE 802.11b. It also uses the 2.4 GHz band, but
enables communications at a maximum speed of 54 Mbps.
The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the
wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer
rate.
Infrastructure Communications
“Infrastructure Communications” refers to networks using wireless
LAN access points.
This function can be used to connect to the Internet or a wired LAN
via a wireless LAN access point. Wireless LAN access points include
wireless broadband routers.
Ad-hoc Communications
Signal transfer through wireless interconnection of computers is referred
to as “ad hoc communications”. With such ad hoc communications
there is no connection to the Internet. Ad hoc communications are
suited for establishing simple temporary networks.
Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
interference, data theft, etc. This grouping is done by “SSID” or
“Security Set Identifiers”. For further security, a WEP key is set and
signal transfer is not possible unless the SSID and WEP key match.
WEP Key (Network Key)
This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting
data transfer. On the AVR-4308CI, the same WEP key is used for data
encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on
both devices in order for communications to be established between
them.
The value indicated above is the maximum theoretical value for the
wireless LAN standard, and does not indicate the actual data transfer
rate.
81
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
12
2007/05/11
16:05:01
Getting Started
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition
to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key),
it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for
stronger security.
Connections
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)
This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.
Setup
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
Playback
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when
a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point
and client.
Remote Control
Passphrase
This refers to the code key used for WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication,
a WPA authentication method.
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
Multi-Zone
This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4,
the same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing
the network key used for encryption for each packet.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
Information
Troubleshooting
This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the
current DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to
be applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael”
algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data
into blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data
lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256
bits as well, offering extremely high encryption security.
82
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
13
2007/05/11
16:05:01
Getting Started
Relationship Between Video Signals and Monitor Output
nMAIN ZONE
Video Convert
Connections
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
ON
With HDMI
monitor
Multi-Zone
Information
Troubleshooting
Without HDMI
monitor
or
with HDMI
monitor off
HDMI
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Input signal
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
A
S (480p ~ 720p)
A
S (480i/576i)
A
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S (1080p)
S
S (480p ~ 720p)
S
S (480i/576i)
S
S: Signal present
A : No signal
480p ~ 720p : 480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p
VIDEO
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
S
S
HDMI
b
b VIDEOz1
b S-VIDEOz1
b S-VIDEOz1
A
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
b VIDEO
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
b S-VIDEO
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
b S-VIDEO
b COMPONENTz1
b COMPONENTz1
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Monitor output
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
VIDEOz1 z4
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z4
A
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEO z4
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
A
COMPONENT
VIDEO z4
A
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEOz1 z4
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z4
VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A
VIDEO z4
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
A
COMPONENT
VIDEO z4
VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENT
COMPONENTz1
COMPONENTz1
VIDEOz1 z4
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEOz1 z4
A
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
VIDEOz1 z4
S-VIDEOz1
S-VIDEOz1
A
A
COMPONENTz1
VIDEO z4
VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
COMPONENTz1
A : No output
z1: The “Picture Adjust” setting can be made.
z2: Superimposed over video signal
z3:Only displayed when the MENU button is
pressed
z4: If the input signal is in SECAM format, it is
converted to PAL for output
Monitor output (when GUI menu displayed)
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
z3
z3
z3
b z3
b VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
z
z
z
b S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEOz2
b S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
z3
z3
z3
b z3
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
A
A
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
z
z
z
b VIDEO 2
VIDEO 2
VIDEO 2
VIDEOz2
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
VIDEO
A
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
b S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
z
z
b S-VIDEO*2
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEOz2
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
b COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
z
HDMI 2
A
A
A
HDMIz2
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMIz2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
A
A
z
HDMI 2
COMPONENT
A
A
z
HDMI 2
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
VIDEO
A
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
z
HDMI 2
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
HDMIz2
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
z
HDMI 2
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
COMPONENT
z
z
z3
3
3
A
VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
A
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
A
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
S-VIDEOz2
A
z
z
z3
3
3
A
z
COMPONENT 2
A
A
A
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
A
VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
VIDEOz2
A
COMPONENTz2
VIDEO
A
A
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
A
z
z
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEOz2
A
COMPONENTz2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
A
z
z
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEOz2
A
COMPONENTz2
S-VIDEO
S-VIDEO
A
COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2 COMPONENTz2
A
b : Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “AtoH” is set) (vpage 30).
: Wallpaper or set background color displayed
: Output according to “Resolution” setting (i/p Scaler : When “HtoH” is set) (vpage 30).
: GUI menu not displayed
•The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4,43, PAL -N, PAL -M and PAL -60.
•When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video connector.
•If the input signal is a component 1080p signal, up-converting to HDMI is not possible.
•The GUI menu display cannot be superimposed when xvYCC signals and component 1080p signal, computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.
83
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
14
2007/05/11
16:05:03
MONITOR OUT (Normally)
MONITOR OUT (when GUI menu displayed)
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI
COMPONENT
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
S
A
A
A
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
A
A
S
A
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
S
S
A
A
S
S
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
A
A
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S
A
S (COMPONENT)
A
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
A
S
S
A
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
S
S
A
S
S
S
A
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
A
S (HDMI)
A
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
S
S (HDMI)
A
A
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
A
S (HDMI)
A
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
S
S (HDMI)
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
A
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
A
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
A
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
A
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S (HDMI)
S (COMPONENT)
S (S-VIDEO)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
S
S
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
S: Signal present
A : No signal
Connections
OFF
SIGNAL IN
HDMI
Getting Started
Video Convert
S: Output present
A : No output
Multi-Zone
To display the GUI menu on an HDMI monitor, output with a resolution of 480p/576p.
nZONE2
Input
VIDEO
COMPONENT
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
S
A
S (VIDEO)
A
S
A
A
S (S-VIDEO)
A
S
S
A
S (S-VIDEO)
S
A
A
S (COMPONENT IN)
A
S
A
S
S (COMPONENT IN)
S (VIDEO)
S
S
A
S (COMPONENT IN)
S (S-VIDEO)
S
S
S
S (COMPONENT IN)
S (S-VIDEO)
S: Signal present
A: No signal
VIDEO
Troubleshooting
S-VIDEO
Information
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
S : Output present
A : No output
: On-screen display not displayed
84
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
15
2007/05/11
16:05:04
Getting Started
Relationship Between Amp Assign Setting and
Speaker Output
STEREO or DIRECT (2ch) Mode
Connections
Status
Setting
2ch Bi-Wiring
Setup
2ch Bi-Amp
Surround mode
SURROUND A
STEREO/DIRECT
Other
STEREO/DIRECT
Other
–
SLA/SRA
–
SLA/SRA
Speaker terminal
SURROUND B/
SURROUND BACK
ASSIGN
–
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
–
–
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
–
ASSIGN-2
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
–
Playback
Multi-Zone Power On/Off
Remote Control
Status
Setting
ZONE2
ON
ZONE2
OFF
Multi-Zone
ON
ZONE3
OFF
Information
ON
ZONE
(MONO)
OFF
Troubleshooting
Bi-Wiring &
ZONE2
Bi-Wiring &
ZONE3
Bi-Wiring &
ZONE(MONO)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ZONE2/
ZONE3
OFF
ON
ZONE2/3
(MONO)
OFF
ZONE3
SURROUND A
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
SLA/SRA
–
SLA/SRA
–
SLA/SRA
–
SLA/SRA
–
SLA/SRA
Speaker terminal
SURROUND
SURROUND B/
BACK
ASSIGN
–
SLB/SRB
–
SLB/SRB
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
–
SLB/SRB
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
–
SLB/SRB
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
–
SLB/SRB
–
SLB/SRB
–
SLB/SRB
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
–
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
–
FL/FR
SBL/SBR
FL/FR
–
Z3 L/R
–
SLB/SRB
–
Z3 L/R
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
–
Z3(MONO)
–
SLB/SRB
–
Z3(MONO)
SBL/SBR
SLB/SRB
ASSIGN-2
Z2 L/R
Z2 L/R
–
–
Z3 L/R
–
Z3 L/R
–
Z2/Z3
Z2/Z3
Z2/Z3
–
Z2 L/R
Z2 L/R
–
–
Z3 L/R
–
Z3 L/R
–
Z2/Z3
Z2/Z3
Z2/Z3
–
Z2 L/R
Z2 L/R
Z2 L/R
–
Z2(MONO)
Z2(MONO)
–
–
85
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
16
2007/05/11
16:05:04
Troubleshooting
Page
22
10
–
GRemote Control UnitH
9
47
•Insert the batteries in the
proper direction, following the
polarity marks in the battery
compartment.
•Move the set to a place in which
the remote control sensor will
not be exposed to strong light.
3
•Release the remote lock mode.
60
3
3
Troubleshooting
40
Page
3
3
Information
47
47
40
Countermeasure
•Replace with new batteries.
•Operate within the specified
range.
•Remove the obstacle.
Multi-Zone
37, 38
Symptom
Cause
Set does not work •Batteries are worn.
properly when
•You are operating outside of the
remote control
specified range.
unit operated.
•Obstacle between main unit and
remote control unit.
•The batteries are not inserted in
the proper direction, as indicated
by the polarity marks in the
battery compartment.
•The set’s remote control sensor
is exposed to strong light (direct
sunlight, inverter type fluorescent
bulb light, etc.).
•Remote lock mode is set.
Remote Control
Cause
Countermeasure
•Connection of the power cord is •Check that the power plugs are
faulty.
securely inserted into the AVR4308CI’s AC inlets and the wall
power outlet.
•Connection with the input •Check the connections.
devices or connection of the
speaker cables is faulty.
•Device you want to play and set •Select an appropriate input
input source do not match.
source.
•Master volume is turned too •Adjust the master volume to an
low.
appropriate level.
•Mute mode is set.
•Cancel the mute mode.
•Headphones are connected.
•Disconnect the headphones.
•No digital signals are being •Select an input source for which
input.
the digital input setting has been
made.
•The connectors to which the •Set the input mode.
digital inputs are assigned and
the settable input modes do not
match.
Display is off.
•The “Dimmer” setting is set to •Set to something other than
“OFF”.
“OFF”.
•The PURE DIRECT mode is set. •Set a surround mode other than
the PURE DIRECT mode.
“DOLBY DIGITAL” •DVD player’s digital audio output •Check the DVD player’s audio
indicator does not
setting is not proper.
output setting. For details, read
appear on display.
the DVD player’s operating
instructions.
10
Playback
Symptom
Power does not
turn on, or turns
off directly after it
was turned on.
No sound is
produced from
speakers.
10
Setup
GGeneralH
Page
10
Connections
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other components operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist,
there may be a malfunction.
In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
Cause
Countermeasure
•Protection circuit activated due •Turn off the power, wait for the
to rise of internal temperature.
set to fully cool down, then turn
the power back on.
•Place the set in a well-ventilated
place.
•Core wires of two speakers are •First unplug the power cord,
touching each other or a core then twist the core wires tightly
wire is sticking out of the terminal or terminate the speaker cables,
and touching the set’s rear panel, then reconnect.
activating the protection circuit.
•Speakers with an impedance •Use speakers with the specified
other than specified are being impedance.
used.
•Set is damaged.
•Turn off the power and contact a
DENON service center.
Getting Started
Symptom
Power turns off
suddenly and
power indicator
flashes red.
36
41, 42
–
86
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
17
2007/05/11
16:05:05
Getting Started
GAudioH
Connections
Symptom
No sound is
produced from
center speaker.
No sound
is produced
from surround
speakers.
Setup
Playback
No sound is
produced from
surround back
speaker.
Remote Control
No sound is
produced from
subwoofer.
Multi-Zone
Information
Cause
•Monaural source (monitor, AM
station, etc.) being played in
“STANDARD” mode.
•The surround mode is set to
“STEREO”, “DIRECT” or “PURE
DIRECT”.
•The surround speaker’s power
amplifier is assigned to a different
channel.
•Surround back speaker setting is
set to “None”.
•Surround mode not set to a mode
for 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback.
•The surround back speaker’s
power amplifier is assigned to a
different channel.
•Subwoofer’s power not turned
on.
•The “Subwoofer” setting at
“Speaker configuration” is set to
“No”.
•The subwoofer is not properly
connected.
•The subwoofer’s volume is
turned off.
•Surround mode not set to
“STANDARD”.
Countermeasure
•The mode is set to something
other than “STANDARD”.
Page
42
•Set to a surround playback
mode.
41, 42
•Check the setting and change it
as necessary.
35
•Set to something other than
“None”.
•Select a surround playback
mode.
•Check the setting and change it
as necessary.
28
•Turn on the subwoofer’s power.
41, 42
35
28
•Check the connections.
9
•Adjust the subwoofer’s volume
to an appropriate level.
•Set to the “STANDARD” mode.
59
41
Troubleshooting
–
Cause
Countermeasure
•The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI • Set to “TV”.
Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to
“Amp”.
Page
30
Cause
Countermeasure
•The format of the GUI and TV •Match the format of the GUI and
(NTSC or PAL) do not match.
TV.
Page
35
GVideoH
Symptom
The on-screen
display does not
appear.
No picture
appears.
–
•Set to “Yes”.
No test tones are
produced when
main remote
control unit’s TEST
TONE button is
pressed.
DTS sound is not •DVD player’s audio output setting •Set the DVD player. For details,
output.
is not set to bitstream.
refer to the DVD player’s
operating instructions.
•DVD player is not compatible •Use a DTS-compatible player.
with DTS sound playback.
•The AVR-4308CI’s “Decode •Set to the “Auto” or “DTS”
Mode” setting is set to “PCM”.
mode.
HDMI audio
•The “Manual Setup” – “HDMI •Set to “Amp”.
signals are not
Setup” – “Audio” setting is set to
output from
“TV”.
speakers.
Symptom
No sound is
output from
the monitor
connected
with HDMI
connections.
No picture
appears
with HDMI
connections.
Picture cannot be
recorded.
•The connections between the
AVR-4308CI and monitor are
faulty.
•The monitor’s input setting is
wrong.
•PURE DIRECT mode is set.
•The player is connected using the
component input connectors, the
monitor is connected using the
video (yellow) or S-Video output
connectors.
•Check the connections.
•The connections to the HDMI
connectors are faulty.
•HDMI input setting is improper.
•The monitor is not compatible
with
copyright
protection
(HDCP).
•The HDMI format of the player
and monitor do not match.
•Input source does not match
recorder’s video connection
connector (video or S-Video).
•Check the connections.
11
•Check the HDMI input setting.
•Connect a monitor that is
compatible
with
copyright
protection (HDCP).
•Match the HDMI format of the
player and monitor.
•The video conversion function
does not work for the REC
OUT connectors. Match the
input source and recorder
connections.
•This is not a malfunction. Most
movie software includes copy
prevention signals and cannot be
copied.
40
11
–
39
30
DVDs cannot be
copied on a VCR.
–
•Set properly.
•Cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.
•High definition (1080i/720p) and
progressive (480p/576p) video
signals are not down-converted.
Set the player to interlace
(480i/576i) signals.
11 ~ 22
–
41, 42
–
11
15
–
87
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
18
2007/05/11
16:05:05
Symptom
iPod cannot be
played.
Cause
Countermeasure
40
13
–
GNET/USBH
40
–
–
–
53
–
34
53
53
–
–
–
–
32 ~ 34
–
–
–
Troubleshooting
53
55
Information
–
–
Multi-Zone
The file names
are not displayed
properly (“...”, etc.).
•Files are stored in a noncompatible format.
•You are attempting to play a file
that is copyright protected.
•Characters that cannot be
displayed are used.
–
53
Remote Control
•USB memory device is divided
into multiple partitions.
•Connect a USB memory device
conforming to mass storage
class or MTP standards.
•Connect to the port set at “USB
Select”.
•This is not a malfunction. DENON
does not guarantee that all USB
memory devices will operate or
receive power.
•Connect the USB memory device
directly to the USB port.
•Set the format to FAT16 or
FAT32. For details, refer to the
USB memory device’s operating
instructions.
•When divided into multiple
partitions, only files stored in the
top partition can be played.
•Record the files in a compatible
format.
•Files that are copyright protected
cannot be played on this set.
•This is not a malfunction. On
this set, characters that cannot
be displayed are replaced with a
“ . (period)”.
Page
18
Page
20
Playback
Files on a USB
memory device
cannot be played.
•USB memory device is connected
via USB hub.
•USB memory device is in format
other than FAT16 or FAT32.
Countermeasure
•Check the connection.
Cause
Countermeasure
•Ethernet cable is not properly •Check the connection status.
connected
or
network
is
disconnected.
•Program is being broadcast in •Only Internet radio programs in
non-compatible format.
MP3 and WMA can be played on
this set.
•The computer’s or router’s •Check the computer’s or router’s
firewall is activated.
firewall settings.
•Radio station is not currently •Choose a radio station that is
broadcasting.
currently broadcasting.
•IP address is wrong.
•Check the set’s IP address.
Files stored on a
•Files are stored in a non- •Record in a compatible format.
computer cannot
compatible format.
be played.
•You are attempting to play a file •Files that are copyright protected
that is copyright protected.
cannot be played on this set.
•Set and computer are connected •The set’s USB port cannot
by USB cable.
be used for connection to a
computer.
Server is not
•The computer’s or router’s •Check the computer’s or router’s
found, or it is
firewall is activated.
firewall settings.
not possible to
•Computer’s power is not turned •Turn on the power.
connect to the
on.
server.
•Server is not running.
•Launch the server.
•Set’s IP address is wrong.
•Check the set’s IP address.
Cannot connect to •Radio station is not currently •Wait a while before trying again.
preset or favorite
broadcasting.
radio stations.
•Radio station is not currently in •It is not possible to connect to
service.
radio stations that are no longer
in service.
For some
•Station is congested or not •Wait a while before trying again.
radio stations,
currently broadcasting.
“Server Full”
or “Connection
Down” is
displayed and
station cannot be
connected to.
Sound is broken
•Network’s signal transfer speed •This is not a malfunction. When
during playback.
is slow or communications lines playing broadcast data with a
or radio station is congested.
high bit rate, the sound may
be broken, depending on the
communications conditions.
Sound quality is
•File being played has a low bit •This is not a malfunction.
poor or played
rate.
sound is noisy.
Setup
Symptom
Cause
When a USB
•The set cannot recognize a USB
memory device is
memory device.
connected, “USB” •A USB memory device not
is not displayed on conforming to mass storage class
the GUI menu.
or MTP standards is connected.
•The set port and the connected
port do not match.
•A USB memory device that
the set cannot recognize is
connected.
Symptom
Internet radio
cannot be played.
Connections
•The input source assigned to •Switch to the input source
“iPod dock” is not selected.
assigned at “iPod dock”.
•Cable is not properly connected. •Reconnect.
•Control Dock for iPod’s AC •Plug the Control Dock for iPod’s
adapter is not connected to AC adapter into a power outlet.
power outlet.
Page
Getting Started
GiPodH
–
–
88
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
19
2007/05/11
16:05:06
Getting Started
GWireless LANH
Symptom
Cannot connect
to network.
Connections
Setup
Playback
Remote Control
Played sound is
interrupted or
sound cannot be
played.
Cause
Countermeasure
•The settings of the SSID •Match the network settings with
and network key (WEP) are the AVR-4308CI’s settings.
incorrect.
•The reception is poor and the •Shorten the distance from the
signals cannot be received.
wireless LAN’s access point,
remove any obstacles and
otherwise improve visibility, then
try reconnecting. Also install
away from microwave ovens
and the access points of other
networks.
•There are multiple networks and •Set the access point’s channel
the usable channels overlap.
settings away from the channels
used for other networks.
Alternatively, connect using a
network cable.
•There are multiple networks and •Set the access point’s channel
the usable channels overlap.
settings away from the channels
used for other networks.
Alternatively, connect using a
network cable.
Page
33
–
–
–
Multi-Zone
GXM Satellite RadioH
Information
Troubleshooting
Symptom
”CHECK
ANTENNA” is
displayed in the
XM mode.
”NO SIGNAL” is
displayed in the
XM mode.
”OFF AIR” is
displayed in the
XM mode.
Receiving only
XM channels 0
and 1.
Cause
Countermeasure
•AVR-4308CI’s XM connector and •Check that the connections are
the XM Mini-Tuner and Home correct.
Dock is not properly connected.
•The signal cannot be received.
•Reposition your XM Mini-Tuner
and Home Dock antenna.
•The selected channel is not •Select another channel.
currently broadcasting.
•The XM Tuner is not activated.
•Contact XM Radio.
Page
18
50
49, 50
49
Specifications
nAudio section
• Power amplifer
Front:
Rated output:
140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround (A + B):
140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back:
140 W + 140 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
170 W + 170 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
150 W x 2ch (8 Ω/ohms)
Dynamic power:
220 W x 2ch (4 Ω/ohms)
Front, Center, Surround back 6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
Output connectors:
6 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
Surround: A or B
8 ~ 16 Ω/ohms
A + B
• Analog
Input sensitivity / Input impedance: 200 mV / 47 kΩ/kohms
10 Hz ~ 100 kHz +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)
Frequency response:
102 dB (DIRECT mode)
S/N:
0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)
Distortion:
1.2 V
Rated output:
• Digital
Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
D/A output:
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Format — Digital audio interface
Digital input:
• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)
2.5 mV
Input sensitivity:
±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
RIAA deviation:
74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)
S/N:
150 mV
Rated output:
0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Distortion factor:
89
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
20
2007/05/11
16:05:06
[FM]
(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W)
87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz
1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)
MONO 77 dB
STEREO 72 dB
MONO 0.15 %
STEREO 0.3 %
520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz
18 µV
nGeneral
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Maximum external dimensions:
Mass:
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
8.1 A
0.3 W Max (Standby)
434 (W) x 195 (H) x 455 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 7-43/64” x 17-29/32”)
18.9 kg (41 lbs 11 oz)
nMain remote control unit (RC-1068)
Batteries:
Maximum external dimensions:
Mass:
[AM]
530 kHz ~ 1710 kHz
18 µV
LR6/AA Type (two batteries)
63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm (2-31/64” x 9-3/8” x 1-7/32”)
190 g (Approx 6.7 oz) (including batteries)
nSub remote control unit (RC-1070)
Batteries:
Maximum external dimensions:
Mass:
R03/AAA Type (two batteries)
49 (W) x 220 (H) x 24.5 (D) mm (1-59/64” x 8-21/32” x 31/32”)
114 g (Approx 4 oz) (including batteries)
z:Wi-Fi® conformity indicates tested and proven interoperability by the “Wi-Fi Alliance”, a group certifying interoperability
among wireless LAN devices.
85 dB
bFor purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Troubleshooting
0.01 %
Information
[FM]
(note: µV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10-15 W)
87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz
1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)
STEREO 23 µV (38.5 dBf)
MONO 77 dB
STEREO 72 dB
HD
85 dB
MONO 0.15 %
STEREO 0.3 %
HD
0.01 %
[AM]
Multi-Zone
Receiving Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
S/N (IHF-A):
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 100 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when video convert set to “OFF”)
Remote Control
nHD Radio section
Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB
Network type (wireless LAN standards) :Conforming to IEEE 802.11b
Conforming to IEEE 802.11g
(Conforming to Wi-Fi®)z
Transfer rate:
DS-SS: 11 / 5.5 / 2 / 1 Mbps (Automatic switching)
OFDM: 54 / 48 / 36 / 24 / 18 / 12 / 9 / 6 Mbps (Automatic switching)
SSID (Network name)
Security:
WEP key (network key) (64/128 bits)
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
2,412 MHz ~ 2,462 MHz
Used frequency range:
Conforming to IEEE 802.11b : 11ch (DS-SS) (Of which 1 channel used)
No. of channels:
Conforming to IEEE 802.11g : 11ch (OFDM) (Of which 1 channel used)
Playback
Receiving Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
S/N (IHF-A):
Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):
1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB
Setup
nTuner section
nWireless LAN
Connections
• Standard video connectors
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• S-Video connectors
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
• Color component video connector
Input / output level and impedance:
Frequency response:
Getting Started
nVideo section
90
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
21
2007/05/11
16:05:06
List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés
Denon Amp
D
Denon
81001, 82001, 83001, 84001
G
Denon Tuner
D
Denon (Analog)
Denon (XM Radio)
52863, 52795, 52800, 52805
52864, 52812, 52813, 52814
Denon Digital Tuner
D
Denon (NET)
Denon (HD Radio)
62865, 62837, 62838, 62839
62840, 62841, 62842, 62843
I
J
Denon iPod
D
Denon
72815, 72816, 72817, 72818
Cable
A
B
C
D
E
F
A-Mark
ABC
Accuphase
Acorn
Action
Active
ADB
Aichi Denshi
Americast
Amstrad
Archer
Auna
Austar
BCC
Bell South
Bestlink
Birmingham Cable
Communications
British Telecom
Cable & Wireless
Century
Coship
Daehan
Daeryung
Digeo
Director
DX Antenna
Emerson
Encon
Fosgate
Foxtel
France Telecom
H
00008, 00144
00237, 00003, 00008
00003
00237
00237
00237
01230
01512
00899
01222
00237
01230
00276
00276
00899
00303
00276
00003
01068
00008
01462
00778
01877, 00877, 00477, 00008
01187
00476
01500
00303
00008
00276
01222
00817
K
L
M
Freebox
Fujitsu
Galaxi
GE
Gehua
General Instrument
Gibralter
GNI
GoldStar
Hitachi
Hongtian Jiangsu
Hwalin
Insight
Jerrold
Jiuzhou
KNC
LG
Macab
Madritel
Maspro
Matav
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Motorola
N
O
P
MS
NEC
Noos
Nova Vision
Novaplex
NTL
Oak
Ono
Optus
Pace
Panasonic
Paragon
Penney
Philips
Pioneer
Q
R
S
Pulsar
PVP Stereo Visual
Matrix
Quasar
RadioShack
Regal
Runco
Sagem
Salora
01482
01497
00008
00237, 00144
00476
00476, 00810, 00276, 00003
00003
01466
00144
00003, 00008
01462
00303
00476, 00810
00476, 00810, 00276, 00003
01445
00008
00144
00817
01230
01510
01082
00000
00003
01376, 00476, 00810, 00276,
01187
00303
01496
00817
00008
00008
00276, 00003, 01060, 01068
00303
01068
00276, 01060
01877, 00877, 00237, 00008,
01060, 01068, 01577
00000, 00008, 00144, 01488
00000, 00008, 00525
00000
01305, 00317, 00817
01877, 00877, 00144, 00533,
01500
00000
00003
00000
00303
00276
00000
00817
00000
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta
T
U
V
Z
Skyworth
Sony
Sprucer
Starcom
StarHub
Sumitomo
Supercable
Taihan
TCL
Telewest
Time Warner cable
TongKook
Torx
Toshiba
Trans PX
TS
United Cable
US Electronics
Videoway
Visiopass
Zenith
00003, 00000, 00144, 00778,
00840, 01060, 01666
01877, 00877, 00477, 00237,
00003, 00000, 00008, 01510
01464
01006, 01460
00144
00003
00276
01500, 01504
00276
00778
01445
01068
01877
00840
00003
00000, 01509
00276, 00303
00003, 00303
00276, 00003
00276, 00003, 00008
00000
00817
00000, 00525, 00899
Cable/PVR Combination
A
D
F
G
J
M
P
S
T
Z
Americast
Digeo
Freebox
General Instrument
Jerrold
Motorola
Pace
Pioneer
Scientific Atlanta
Sony
Supercable
Time Warner cable
Zenith
00899
01187
01482
00810
00810
01376, 00810, 01187
01877, 00237
01877, 00877
01877, 00877
01006
00276
01877
00899
B
C
D
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
CD Player
A
Acoustic Research
Advantage
Aiwa
Arcam
Audio Research
Audiolab
Audiomeca
40420
40032
40157
40157
40157
40157
40157
M
Audioton
AVI
Balanced Audio
Technology
Burmester
Bush
Cairn
California Audio Labs
Cambridge
Cambridge Audio
Cambridge
Soundworks
Carver
CDC
CEC
Copland
Curtis Mathes
Cyrus
Denon
DKK
DMX Electronics
Dual
Dynaco
Dynamic Bass
Fisher
Garrard
Genexxa
Goldmund
Grundig
Hafler
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Inkel
Integra
Jerrold
JVC
Kenwood
KLH
Krell
Linn
Loewe
Luxman
LXI
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
MCS
Memorex
Meridian
40157
40157
Micromega
Miro
Mission
40157
40420
40388
40157
40029, 40303
40157
40157
40157
40157, 40179
40420
40420
40393
40032
40157
40873, 40003, 40766,
[42867]z, 42868
40000
40157
40003
40157
40179
40000, 40179
40393, 40420
40000, 40032, 40037, 40179
40157
40157
40173
40100, 40157, 40173
40032
40157
40101
40003
40032, 40072
40681, 40000, 40029, 40157,
40028, 40037, 40036, 40190
41318
40157
40157
40157
40393
40179
40157
40029, 40157
40157
40029
40000, 40032, 40179, 40420,
40468
40157
Modulaire
N
O
MTC
Musical Fidelity
Myryad
NAD
Naim
NSM
Onkyo
Optimus
P
Q
R
Orion
Panasonic
Parasound
Penney
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Proceed
Proton
QED
Quad
Quasar
Radiola
RadioShack
RCA
Realistic
S
Restek
Revox
Roksan
Rotel
Royal
SAE
Saisho
Sansui
Sanyo
SAST
Sears
Sharp
Siemens
Silsonic
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
Sugden
Sylvania
40157
40000
40157
40000, 40032, 40087, 40179,
40420, 40468
40420
40393
40157
40000, 40721
40157
40157
40868, 40101
40000, 40032, 40037, 40087,
40179, 40393, 40420, 40468
40393
40029, 40303, 40388, 40752
40420
40029
40157
40032, 40101, 40468
40157
40420
40157
40157
40157
40029
40157
40000, 40032, 40179, 40420,
40468
40032, 40053, 40179, 40420,
40468
40000, 40032, 40087, 40179,
40420, 40468
40157
40157
40420
40157, 40420
40420
40157
40000
40000, 40157
40000, 40087, 40179
40157
40179
40037
40157
40036
40157
40157
40490, 40000, 40100, 41364,
40185
40157
40157
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
22
2007/05/11
16:05:07
T
U
V
W
TAG McLaren
Tandy
Tascam
Teac
Technics
Techwood
Thomson
Thorens
Thule Audio
Tokai
Universum
Victor
Wadia
Wards
Y
Yamaha
Yorx
40157
40032
40393, 40420
40490, 40393, 40420
40029, 40303
40303
40053
40157
40157
40420
40157, 40053
40072
40393
40000, 40032, 40157, 40053,
40087, 40179
40490, 40868, 40032, 40036
40000
CD Recorder
D
J
R
S
T
Denon
JVC
RCA
Sony
Teac
Thomson
40766, 42868
40072
40053, 40420
40000, 40100, 41364
40420
40053
C
D
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Aiwa
Akai
Arcam
Audiolab
Carver
Denon
Fisher
Garrard
Genexxa
GoldStar
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Inkel
JVC
Kenwood
LG
Luxman
Magnavox
Marantz
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Myryad
P
Onkyo
Optimus
Orion
Palladium
Panasonic
Philips
Phonotrend
Pioneer
R
S
Polk Audio
Radiola
RCA
Revox
Sansui
Sanyo
Sharp
Sherwood
Sonic
Sony
Tape Deck
A
O
20029, 20197, 20200, 21315
20283, 20439
20076
20029
20029
20076, 20371, 21311,
[22471]z
20074
20308, 20309, 20375, 20439
20439
20375
20029, 20375
20182, 20029, 21314
20070, 20071, 20337
20244, 20273, 20274, 20303,
20304, 20310, 21309
20070, 20071, 20092, 20233,
20234, 21364
20375
20308, 20309
20029
20029, 20009
20099
20283, 20439
20029
T
TaeKwang
Tandberg
Teac
U
V
W
Y
Technics
Technovox
Thorens
Universum
Victor
Wards
Wharfedale
Yamaha
20135, 20136, 20282
20027, 20220, 20337, 20439
20308, 20309
20375
20229
20029, 20229
20337
20027, 20220, 20099, 20109,
21306, 21312
20029
20029
20027, 20220
20029
20029, 20009
20074
20231, 20371
20337
20375
20243, 20170, 20291, 20234,
21313
20439
20109
20280, 20283, 20289, 20308,
20309
20229
20229
20029
20375, 20439
20244, 20273, 20274
20027, 20029
20439
20097, 20094
HDTV Tuner
A
C
D
E
G
H
I
L
M
ABS
Accurian
Alienware
CyberPower
D-Link
Dgtec
Epson
Gateway
Hewlett Packard
Howard Computers
HP
Hush
iBUYPOWER
LG
Linksys
Media Center PC
Microsoft
Mind
01272
01653
01272
01272
01554
01363
01563
01272
01272, 01267
01272
01272, 01267
01272
01272
01415
01272, 01365
01272
01272, 01805
01272
N
P
R
S
T
V
X
Z
Motorola
Niveus Media
Northgate
Packard Bell
Panasonic
Pioneer
Ricavision
Samsung
Sensory Science
Sharp
SMC
Sony
Stack 9
Sylvania
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Toshiba
Touch
Viewsonic
Vizio
Voodoo
Xbox
ZT Group
01363
01272
01272
01272
01120
01010
01272
01190, 01490
01126
01010
01456
01272, 01324, 01364
01272
01563
01272
01272
01272
01272
01272, 01329
01126
01272
01805
01272
ASLF
AssCom
Astacom
Aston
Astra
Astratec
Astro
Atlantic Telephone
Atsat
AtSky
Audioline
Aurora
Austar
B
Satellite Receiver
A
@sat
@Sky
A-Mark
ABsat
ADB
AGS
Aiwa
Akai
Alba
Allsat
Alltech
Allvision
AlphaStar
Amitronica
Amstrad
Anglo
Ankaro
AntSat
Apollo
Arcon
Armstrong
Arnion
Asat
ASCI
01300
01334
00345
00123, 00713
00642, 01259, 01367, 01418,
01473, 01491
00710
01514
00200
00455, 00713, 01284, 01659,
01811
00200, 01043
00713
01232, 01334, 01412
00772
00713
00345, 00713, 00795, 00847,
00863, 00882, 01113, 01175,
01693, 01801
00713
00713
01083
00455
01043, 01075
00200
01300
00200
01334
Axiel
Axil
Axis
B@ytronic
Beko
Bell ExpressVu
Big Sat
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boca
Boston
Brainwave
British Sky
Broadcasting
Broco
BskyB
BT
Bubu Sat
Bush
C
Canal
Canal Digital
Canal Satellite
Canal+
Centrex
CGV
Chaparral
Cherokee
Chess
Chili
CityCom
Classic
Clatronic
CNS
Comag
Condor
Conia
00713
00853
00710
00142
00713
01743
00173, 00658, 01099, 01100,
01113
01333
01300
01334
01672
00642, 00879, 01333, 01433
00497, 00642, 00863, 00879,
01176, 01259
00710
01457, 01659
01111
01412
00455
00775
01457
01284
00173
00713
00713, 01232, 01366
00710, 01251
00658, 01672
D
00847, 01175, 01662, 01847
00713
00847, 01175, 01662
00710, 01296
00713
01284, 01645, 01672, 01743,
01811
00853
00853, 01622
00853, 01339, 01853
00853
01457
01413, 01567
00216
00123, 00710
00713, 01085, 01334, 01626
01718
00299, 00394, 00818, 01075,
01176, 01232
01672
01413
01367
01232, 01366, 01412, 01413
01700
01695
E
Contec
Continental Edison
Coship
Crossdigital
Crown
Cryptovision
Cyfra+
Cyrus
D-box
Daewoo
Delfa
Deltasat
Dgtec
Digenius
Digiality
Digifusion
DigiLogic
DigiQuest
DigiSat
Digisky
DigitAll World
Digiturk
Digiwave
Dijam
DiPro
00394
01695
01457
01109
01284
00455, 00795
01076
00200
00723, 00873, 01114
00713, 01111, 01296, 01743
00863
01075
01542, 01631, 01242
00299
01685
01645, 01743
01284
00863, 01300, 01457, 01473
01232
01457
01227
01076
01631
01296
01367, 01543
01377, 00392, 00566, 00639,
01639, 01142, 00247, 00749,
01749, 00724, 00819, 01856,
DirecTV
01076, 01108, 00099, 01109,
01414, 01442, 01609, 01392,
01640
Discovery
00710
Dish Network System 01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Dishpro
01505, 01005, 00775, 01775
Distratel
01283, 01704
DMT
01075
DNT
00200
Dream Multimedia 01237
DSE
01375
DSTV
00642, 00879, 01433
Durabrand
01284
DX Antenna
01530
01505, 01005, 00775, 00455,
00610, 00713, 00853, 00871,
Echostar
01086, 01200, 01323, 01409,
01418, 01473, 01775
Einhell
00713
Elap
00713, 01567
Elsat
00713
Elta
00200, 01659
Emme Esse
00871
Energy Sistem
01631
Engel
00713, 01251
EP Sat
00455
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
23
2007/05/11
16:05:09
F
G
Esat
Eurieult
Eurocrypt
EuroLine
Europa
Europhon
Eurosky
Eurostar
Eutelsat
Expressvu
Fenner
Ferguson
Finlandia
Finlux
Flair Mate
FMD
Force
Fortec Star
00879
00882
00455
01251
00863
00299
00262, 00299
00818
00713
00775, 01775
00713
00455, 01291, 01743
00455
00455
00713
01251, 01413, 01457
01101
01083
00455, 00497, 00795, 00879,
Foxtel
01162, 01176, 01356
Fracapro Planet
00871
Fracarro
00125, 00871
France Telecom
00871
Freesat
00882
FTE
00863
FTEmaximal
00713, 00863
00173, 00262, 00299, 00394,
Fuba
01214, 01251, 01801
Fugionkyo
00125
Funai
01377
00853, 00863, 01101, 01111,
Galaxis
01557
Gardiner
00818
Garnet
01075
GbSAT
01214
GE
00392, 00566
Gecco
01412
General Instrument 00869
General Satellite
01176
GF Good Friends
01043
GF Star
01043
01251, 01334, 01412, 01429,
Globo
01626
GOD Digital
00200
GOI
00775, 01775
Gold Box
00853
Gold Vision
01631
Golden Interstar
01283
GoldStar
00394
Goodmans
00455, 01284, 01291
Gradiente
00887
Granada
00455
00173, 00345, 00847, 00853,
Grundig
00879, 01291
H
Handan
Hanseatic
Hauppauge
HB
HDT
Hills
Hirschmann
Hisense
Hitachi
Homecast
Hornet
Houston
HTS
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
I
J
K
Huth
Hyundai
iCan
ID Digital
ILLUSION sat
iLo
Imperial
Indovision
Ingelen
Innova
Interstar
InVideo
ISkyB
Italtel
ITT Nokia
Jadeworld
Jaeger
Jerrold
Jiuzhou
JOK
JVC
K-SAT
Kamm
Kaon
KaTelco
Kathrein
Kennex
Kenwood
Klap
Kocmoc TB
Koscom
01622
01099, 01100
01672
01214, 01801
01159
01232
00125, 00173, 00299, 00710,
00882, 01085, 01111, 01232,
01412
01535
00749, 00819, 00455, 01250,
01284, 01518, 01523, 01525
01214, 01680, 01700
01300
00775
00775, 01775
L
01142, 00749, 01749, 01442
00863, 01176, 01225, 01406,
01427, 01675, 01743, 01790,
01915
01075
01075, 01159
01367
01176
01557, 01631
01535
01334, 01429, 01672
00887
00882
00099
01214
00871
00887
00871
00455, 00723, 00873
00642
01334
00869
01450
00710
00775, 01507, 01531, 01775
00713
00713
01300
01111
00123, 00173, 00200, 00249,
00394, 00442, 00480, 00504,
00658, 00713, 00818, 01221,
01416, 01561, 01567
00125
00853
00710
01333
01043
M
Kosmos
Kreiling
Kreiselmeyer
Kross
L&S Electronic
Labgear
LaSAT
Lava
Legend
Legrand
Lemon
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG
Lifesat
Lodos
Logik
Logix
Lorenzen
Luxor
M Electronic
M vision
Magnavox
Manata
Manhattan
Marantz
Maspro
Master’s
Matsui
Maximum
McIntosh
MDS
Mediabox
Mediacom
MediaSa
Medion
Medison
Mega
Memorex
Metronic
Metz
MiCO
Micro
Micro Elektronic
Micro Technology
Micromaxx
Microstar
Microtec
Mitsubishi
Morgan’s
Motorola
00442, 01333
00249, 00658
00173
01695
01043, 01334
01296
00173, 00299
01631
01718
01718
01334
00713
01611
01075, 01414
00299, 00713, 01043
01284
01284
01075
00299
00345, 00873
00818
01557
00724, 00722
00710, 00713
00455, 00710, 01083
00200
00173, 00713, 01530
00394
00173, 00710, 01284, 01743
01075, 01334, 01685
00869
01225
00853
01206
00853
00299, 00713, 01043, 01075,
01232, 01334, 01412, 01626
00713
00200
00724
00713, 00818, 01283, 01334,
01375, 01704
00173
01811
00713
00713
00713
00299
01075
00713
00749, 00455
00200, 00713, 01232, 01412
00869, 00856, 01473
MTEC
Muller
Multibroadcast
Multichoice
N
Mx Onda
Myryad
Mysat
MySky
NEC
NEOTION
Netgem
Netsat
Neuf TV
Neuhaus
Neuling
Neusat
Nevir
Next Level
Nikko
Noda Electronic
Nokia
O
Nordmende
OctalTV
Okano
Omega
Opentel
Optex
P
Optimus
Optus
Orbis
Orbitech
Origo
OSAT
P/Sat
Pace
Pacific
Packard Bell
Packsat
Palcom
Panarex
Panasat
Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
peeKTon
01214
01695
00642, 00879
00642, 00879, 01333, 01433,
01559, 01560
01659
00200
00713
01693, 01848, 01850
01519
01334
01322
00099, 00887
01322
00713
01232
00713
01659
00869
00200, 00713, 00723
01704
00455, 00723, 00751, 00853,
00873, 01023, 01223, 01723
00455, 01611
01505
00442
00887
01232, 01412
00394, 00713, 01043, 01283,
01611
00724
00879
01232, 01334, 01412
01099, 01100
00497
00345
01232
00200, 00329, 00455, 00497,
00795, 00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356, 01423,
01693, 01717, 01848, 01850
01284, 01375
01111
00710
00299, 01409
01159
00615, 00879, 01333, 01433
00247, 00701, 00455, 00847,
01304, 01404, 01508, 01526,
01527
00173, 00455
01159
00710
00724
01457
Philips
Phonotrend
Pilotime
Pino
Pioneer
Q
R
Planet
Plasmatic
PMB
Polytron
Portland
Preisner
Premier
Prima
Primacom
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Proscan
Proton
QNS
Quadral
Quelle
Radiola
RadioShack
Radix
RCA
S
Rebox
Regal
RFT
Roadstar
Rollmaster
Rover
Rownsonic
SAB
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Samsung
Sat Control
Sat Team
SAT+
Satec
Satelco
Satplus
01142, 00749, 01749, 00775,
00724, 00819, 01076, 00722,
00099, 00710, 00455, 00818,
00200, 00847, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00133, 01442, 01543,
01672
00863, 01200
01339
01334
01142, 00329, 00853, 01308,
01442
00871
00442
00713, 01611
00394
01296
00262, 01101, 01113, 01366
00723, 00853, 00873, 01429
00795
01111
00869
00710
00455
00392, 00566
01535
01367, 01402, 01404
00710
00299
00200
00566, 00775, 00869
00394, 00882, 01113, 01317
00392, 00566, 01142, 00775,
00855, 00143, 01291, 01392,
01442
01214
01251
00200
00713, 00853
01413
00713
01567
01251
00710, 00820
00455
00820, 01114, 01253, 01307,
01690
01377, 01142, 01276, 01108,
01109, 00853, 00863, 01206,
01442, 01458, 01570, 01609,
01700, 01916
01300
00713
01409
00713
01232
01100
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
24
2007/05/11
16:05:10
Satstation
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
T
01083
01214
00710, 01206, 01251
00394, 00504, 00863, 01075,
Schwaiger
01083, 01111, 01317, 01334,
01412, 01457
SCS
00299
Sedea Electronique 00125, 01206, 01283, 01626
SEG
01075, 01087, 01251, 01626
Seleco
00871
Septimo
01375
Serd
01412
Serino
00610
Servimat
01611
ServiSat
00713, 01251
Sharp
01517
Siemens
00173, 01334, 01429
Silva
00299
Skantin
00713
SKR
00713
00856, 00099, 00847, 00887,
SKY
01014, 01175, 01662, 01693,
01847, 01848, 01850
SKY Italia
00853, 01693, 01847, 01848
Sky Television
01014
Sky XL
01251, 01412
Sky+
01175
00713, 01075, 01085, 01200,
Skymaster
01334, 01409, 01567, 01611
Skymax
00200
Skyplus
01232, 01334, 01412
SkySat
00713
Skyvision
01334
SL
00299, 01672
SM Electronic
00713, 01200, 01409
00713, 00882, 01101, 01113,
Smart
01232, 01404, 01413
00639, 01639, 00455, 00847,
Sony
00853, 01524, 01558, 01640
Star
00887
Star Choice
00869
Star Trak
00772, 00869
Starland
00713
Starlite
00200
Stream
01847, 01848
00125, 00713, 00820, 00853,
Strong
00879, 01159, 01284, 01300,
01409, 01626
Sunkai
00123
Sunny
01300
Sunsat
00713
Sunstar
00642
Supernova
00887
SVA
01455
Systec
01334
Tantec
00455
Tarbs
Tatung
TBoston
Teac
Tecatel
TechniSat
Technomate
Technosonic
Technotrend
Techwood
Tele System
Electronic
Teleciel
TeleClub
Telefunken
Teleka
Telestar
Telesystem
Televes
Televisa
Telewire
Tevion
Thomson
Thorn
Tiny
Tioko
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Topfield
Toshiba
TPS
Triax
U
Trio
TT-micro
Turnsat
Twinner
UEC
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
United
Universum
V
US Digital
USDTV
Variosat
01225
00455
01659
01225, 01227, 01251, 01322
01200
00262, 00455, 00863, 01099,
01100, 01195, 01197, 01322
01283, 01610
01672
01429
01284, 01626
Ventana
Vestel
VH Sat
Viasat
ViewSat
Visionic
VisionNet
Visiosat
01251, 01409, 01611, 01801
01043
01367
00710
00262, 00442
01099, 01100, 01251, 01334,
01610, 01626
01801
00455, 01214, 01300, 01334
00887
01232
00713, 01409, 01622, 01672
00392, 00566, 00455, 00710,
00713, 00820, 00847, 00853,
01046, 01175, 01291, 01534,
01543, 01662
00455
01672
00394
01142, 01442
00200
00455, 00713, 01611
01206, 01208, 01545, 01783
00749, 01749, 00790, 00819,
00455, 01285, 01501, 01516,
01530
00820, 01253, 01307
00200, 00713, 00853, 01113,
01227, 01251, 01291, 01296,
01626
01075
01429
00713
00713, 01611
00879, 01162, 01333, 01356
01392, 01640
00724, 00722
00200
01251
00173, 00299, 01087, 01099,
01251
01535
01535
00173
W
Viva
Vivid
Voom
VTech
Wavelength
Wewa
Wharfedale
Winbox
Wintel
Wisi
Worldsat
X
Xcom
XMS
Xsat
Y
Z
Xtreme
Yakumo
Yamada
Yes
Zehnder
Zenith
Zeta Technology
Zodiac
00200
01251
00299
01682
01232
00125, 01283
01557
00142, 00710, 00713, 01413,
01457, 01718
00856
01162
00869
00818
01232, 01413
00455
01284
01801
00299
00173, 00299, 00455
00123, 00710, 01214, 01251,
01543
00123
01075
00123, 00713, 00847, 01214,
01323
01300
01413
01718
00887
00394, 00504, 00818, 01075,
01232, 01251, 01334, 01412,
01413
00856, 01856
00200
01801
E
F
G
H
K
L
M
N
O
P
DBS/PVR Combination
A
B
C
D
@sat
Allvision
Amstrad
Atsat
B@ytronic
British Sky
Broadcasting
BskyB
Bush
Canal Satellite
Comag
Digifusion
DigiQuest
Digiturk
01300
01412
01175
01300
01412
R
01175
S
01175, 01662
01645
01339
01412
01645
01300
01076
01377, 00392, 00639, 01142,
DirecTV
01076, 00099, 01392, 01442,
01640
Dish Network System 01505, 00775
Dishpro
DMT
Dream Multimedia
Echostar
Expressvu
Foxtel
GbSAT
Gecco
Globo
HDT
Hirschmann
Homecast
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
Huth
Hyundai
Kaon
Kathrein
LG
Maximum
Mediacom
Medion
Microstar
Morgan’s
Motorola
MTEC
Multichoice
MySky
NEOTION
Nokia
Opentel
Orbis
Pace
Panasonic
Philips
Pilotime
Proscan
Radix
RCA
Rebox
Sagem
Samsung
Sat Control
Schneider
Schwaiger
Sedea Electronique
Serd
SKY
SKY Italia
Sky XL
Skymaster
01505, 00775
01075
01237
01505, 00775, 00610
00775
01356
01214
01412
01412
01159
01412
01680
T
X
Z
Skyplus
Sony
Star Choice
Strong
Sunny
TechniSat
Thomson
Topfield
TPS
Xtreme
Zehnder
01142, 01442
Television
01176, 01427, 01675
01075
01075, 01159
01300
00249, 00658, 01221, 01561
01075
01334
01206
01412
01075
01412
00869
01214
01333, 01559, 01560
01693, 01848, 01850
01334
01023
01412
01412
01175, 01356, 01423, 01850
01304
01142, 00099, 01442
01339
00392
01317
01392
01214
01253, 01307
01206, 01442, 01570, 01609
01300
01206
01075, 01412
01206
01412
01175, 01693, 01848, 01850
01848
01412
01075
1
A
888
A-Mark
A.R. Systems
Accent
Accuscan
Accuscreen
Acoustic Research
Action
Acura
Addison
ADL
Admiral
Advent
Adventuri
Adyson
AEG
Agashi
Agna
Aiko
Aim
Aiwa
Akai
Akashi
Akiba
Akira
Akito
Akura
Alaron
01412
00639, 01640
00869
01300
01300
01195, 01197
01175, 01534, 01662
01206, 01545, 01783
01253, 01307
01300
01075, 01412
10264
10047, 10054, 10009
10037, 10352, 10374, 10455,
10556
10009, 10037
10047
10001
11269
10030, 10650
10009
10092, 10108, 10653
11217
10047, 10054, 10017, 10051,
10093, 10463, 10180, 10163,
10264, 10418
10761, 10783, 10815, 10817,
10842, 10876, 11933
10000
10217
11163, 11556
10217, 10264
10150
10092, 10009, 10035, 10037,
10217, 10264, 10361, 10371,
10433
10706, 10037, 10455, 10805
10264, 10701, 11904, 11911
10000, 10060, 10812, 10702,
10178, 10030, 10145, 10602,
10606, 10631, 10648, 10672,
10714, 10715, 11207, 11537,
11675, 11676, 11903, 10556,
10548, 10480, 10433, 10371,
10361, 10264, 10218, 10217,
10208, 10163, 10037, 10035,
10009
10009, 10860
10037, 10218, 10455
10418
10037
10171, 10009, 10037, 10163,
10218, 10264, 10668, 10714,
11037, 11498, 11556, 11982
10170
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
25
2007/05/11
16:05:11
Alba
Albatron
Alfide
All-Tel
Alleron
Allorgan
Allstar
Ambassador
America Action
American High
Amplivision
Amstrad
Amtron
Anam
Anam National
Andersson
Anglo
Anhua
Anitech
Ansonic
AOC
Aolinpike
Apex Digital
AR
Arc En Ciel
Arcam
Ardem
Aristocrat
Aristona
ART
Arthur Martin
ASA
Asberg
Asora
Astra
Asuka
ATD
Atlantic
Atori
Auchan
Audinac
Audiosonic
Audioton
10009, 10036, 10037, 10073,
10163, 10218, 10352, 10370,
10371, 10418, 10443, 10487,
10668, 10714, 11037
10700, 10843
10672
10865, 11269
10030, 10170
10217
10037
10150
10180
10000, 10060
10217, 10370
10000, 10171, 10009, 10011,
10037, 10163, 10218, 10264,
10362, 10371, 10433, 10648,
11037, 11982
10000, 10180
10250, 10180, 10009, 10037,
10700, 10861
10250, 10037, 10650
11149, 11163
10009, 10264
10051
10009, 10037, 10264
10009, 10037, 10163, 10370,
10374, 10668
10451, 10093, 10180, 10060,
10178, 10030, 10092, 10009,
10108
10264
10156, 10748, 10879, 10765,
10767, 11217, 11943
10352, 10556
10109
10217
10037, 10714
10163
10037, 10556
11037
10163
10070
10037
10009
10037
10217, 10218, 10264
10698
10001, 10037
10009
10163
10180
10009, 10037, 10109, 10217,
10218, 10264, 10370, 10374,
10486, 10714, 10715, 10820
10217, 10264, 10370, 10486
Audiovox
Audioworld
Aumark
Autovox
Aventura
AVP
Awa
B
Axion
Axxent
Baier
Baihe
Baile
Baird
Bang & Olufsen
Baohuashi
Baosheng
Barco
Basic Line
Bastide
Bauer
Baur
Baysonic
Bazin
Beaumark
Beijing
Beko
Belcor
Bell & Howell
Belson
Belstar
BenQ
Beon
Berthen
Best
Bestar
Bestar-Daewoo
Binatone
Black Diamond
Blackway
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boots
BPL
10451, 10180, 10092, 10623,
10802, 10875, 11937, 11951,
11952
10698
10060
10217
10171
10000
10451, 10009, 10011, 10036,
10108, 10217, 10264, 10374,
10606
11937, 11958
10009
10876
10009, 10264
10001, 10009, 10374, 10661
10037, 10073, 10109, 10208,
10217, 10343, 11196
10565
10264
10009, 10817
10163, 10556
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,
10218, 10374, 10455, 10556,
10668, 11037, 11163
10217
10805
10037, 10195, 10361, 10455,
10512
10180
10217
10017, 10178, 10030
10812, 10001, 10009, 10208,
10226, 10264, 10374, 10661,
10817, 10821
10037, 10195, 10370, 10418,
10486, 10606, 10714, 10715,
10808, 11037
10030
10054, 10017, 10154, 10093
10698, 11191
11037
11032, 11756
10037, 10163, 10218, 10418
10668
10370
10037, 10370, 10374
10374
10217
10614, 10820, 10821, 11037,
11163, 11909
10218
10036, 10170, 10195, 10200,
10327, 10455
10037, 10218, 10455, 10487,
10499, 10556, 10668, 10714,
10715, 11037, 11191, 11363
10009, 10217
10037, 10208
Bradford
Brandt
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Britannia
Brockwood
Broksonic
Brother
BSR
BTC
Bush
C
Caihong
Cailing
Candle
Canton
Capehart
Capetronic
Capsonic
Carad
Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Celestial
Centrex
Centrum
Centurion
CGE
Changcheng
Changfei
Changfeng
Changhai
Changhong
Chengdu
Ching Tai
Chun Yun
Chunfeng
Chung Hsin
10180
10109, 10287, 10335, 10560,
10625, 10714
10037, 10418, 10486, 10668
10037, 10362
10217
10178, 10030
10236, 10463, 10180, 11911,
11938
10264
10163
10218
11900, 11556, 11037, 10778,
10714, 10698, 10668, 10661,
10614, 10556, 10487, 10374,
10371, 10361, 10335, 10264,
10218, 10217, 10208, 10163,
10037, 10036, 10009
10009, 10817
10748
10030
10218
10017, 10178, 10030, 10092,
10036
10030
10264
10610, 10668, 11037
10037, 10455
10030
10036, 10037, 10070
10054, 10170
10009, 10037
10037
10037, 10218
10037, 10217
10000
10765
10767, 10819, 10820, 10821
10780
11037
10037
10074, 10163, 10370, 10418
10051, 10001, 10009, 10264,
10374, 10661, 10817
10009, 10374, 10817
10264, 10817
10009, 10817
10156, 10765, 10009, 10264,
10508, 10767, 10783, 10817,
10819, 10820, 10821, 11008,
11156
10009, 10817
10092, 10009
10000, 10180, 10092, 10009,
10700, 10843
10009, 10264
10180, 10053, 10036, 10108
Chunsun
Cimline
Cinema
Cineral
Cinex
Citek
D
10009, 10817
10009, 10218
10672
10451, 10092
10648, 11556
10047
10054, 10000, 10451, 10463,
Citizen
10180, 10060, 10030, 10171,
10092, 10001, 10035
City
10009
Clarion
10180
Clarivox
10037, 10070, 10418
Classic
10030, 10092, 10499
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
Clatronic
10264, 10370, 10371, 10714
Clayton
11037
CMS Hightec
10217
10047, 10054, 10017, 10060,
Colortyme
10178, 10030
Commercial Solutions 11447, 10047
Concorde
10009
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370,
Condor
10418
Conia
10820, 10821, 11498
Conic
10178
Conrac
10808
10156, 10145, 10009, 10264,
Conrowa
10698, 11156, 11170
Contec
10180, 10009, 10036, 10037
Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487
Cosmel
10009, 10037
Craig
10180, 10171
10054, 10000, 10180, 10030,
Crosley
10171, 10074, 10163, 10370
10093, 10180, 10053, 10009,
10037, 10208, 10370, 10418,
Crown
10486, 10487, 10606, 10672,
10712, 10714, 10715, 11037
Crown Mustang
10672
CS Electronics
10218
CTX
11756
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10051, 10451, 10093, 10180,
Curtis Mathes
10060, 10702, 10178, 10030,
10145, 10166, 10037, 10035,
11147, 11347
CXC
10180
Cybertron
10218
Cytronix
11298
D-Vision
10037, 10556, 11982
10154, 10451, 10180, 10178,
10030, 10092, 11661, 10634,
10661, 10672, 10700, 10860,
10865, 10876, 10880, 11755,
Daewoo
11756, 11909, 10623, 10556,
10499, 10374, 10264, 10218,
10217, 10170, 10109, 10108,
10037, 10036, 10009
Dainichi
10218
Dansai
Dantax
Datsura
Dawa
Daytek
Dayton
Daytron
Dayu
De Graaf
Decca
Degraff
Deitron
Dell
Denko
Denon
Denver
Desmet
Diamant
Diamond
Digatron
Digiline
Digital Life
Digitex
Digitor
Digix Media
Dixi
DL
Domeos
Domland
Dongda
Donghai
Dream Vision
DSE
DTS
Dual
Dual Tec
Dumont
Durabrand
E
Dux
Dwin
Dynatech
Dynatron
Easy Living
Eaton
Ecco
ECE
Edison-Minerva
Elbe
10009, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10208, 10217
10370, 10486, 10714, 10715
10208
10009, 10037
10672, 11207
10092, 10009, 11207
10180, 10178, 10030, 10092,
10009, 10036, 10037, 10374
10374, 10661
10163, 10208, 10548
10037, 10217
10163, 10208
10374
11080, 11178
10264
10145, 10511
10037, 10587
10009, 10037
10037
10706, 10009, 10371, 10672,
10698, 10820, 10860
10037
10037, 10668
10872
10820
10037
10880
10009, 10037, 10217
10587, 10780, 10872
10668
10394
10009
10009
11164, 11704
10698, 10820, 11556
10009
10037, 10217, 10343, 10352,
10394, 11037, 11137
10217
10017, 10180, 10178, 10070,
10217
10463, 10180, 10178, 10171,
11034, 11463
10037
10093
10217
10037
11248
10060
10773
10037
10487
10037, 10217, 10218, 10362,
10610
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
26
2007/05/11
16:05:12
Elcit
Electroband
Electrograph
F
10163
10000
11755
10154, 10000, 10463, 10150,
Electrohome
10178, 10030, 10073
Elekta
10009, 10264
Elfunk
11037, 11208
ELG
10037
Elin
10009, 10037, 10361, 10548
Elite
10037, 10218
Elta
10009, 10264
Emerald
10178
10047, 10017, 10154, 10451,
10236, 10463, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10171, 11944, 11911,
Emerson
11909, 10714, 10668, 10623,
10486, 10036, 10371, 10370,
10361, 10037, 10195, 10170,
10070, 10073
Envision
10030, 10813
Enzer
10860
Erae
11371
Erres
10037
ESA
10812, 10171, 11944
ESC
10037, 10217
Ether
10030, 10009
Etron
10001, 10009, 10163, 10820
Eurofeel
10217, 10264
Euroman
10037, 10217, 10264, 10370
Europa
10037
Europhon
10037, 10109, 10217
Evesham Technology 11248
Evolution
11756
Expert
10163
Exquisit
10037
Feilang
10009
Feilu
10009, 10817
Feiyan
10264
Feiyue
10009, 10817
Fenner
10009, 10374
Fer0
10335
10053, 10037, 10073, 10109,
10195, 10287, 10335, 10343,
Ferguson
10443, 10548, 10560, 10625,
11037
10171, 10037, 10163, 10217,
Fidelity
10264, 10361, 10371, 10512
Filsai
10217
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,
Finlandia
10548
10037, 10070, 10163, 10217,
Finlux
10346, 10480, 10556, 10631,
10714, 10715, 10808, 11556
Firstar
10236, 10009
10009, 10037, 10208, 10217,
10361, 10374, 10556, 10668,
Firstline
10714, 10808, 11037, 11191,
11363, 11371
Fisher
Flint
Force
Formenti
Fortress
Fraba
Friac
Frontech
Fujimaro
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
G
Furi
Furichi
Futronic
Futuretech
Galaxi
Galaxis
Ganxin
Gateway
GBC
GE
GEC
Geloso
Gemini
General
General Technic
Genesis
Genexxa
Gericom
Gevalt
Giant
Gibralter
Go Video
Go Vision
Goldfunk
GoldStar
Gooding
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10036, 10208, 10217, 10361,
10370
10037, 10218, 10264, 10455,
10610
11149
10037, 10163
10093
10037, 10370
10009, 10037, 10370, 10499,
10610
10009, 10163, 10217, 10264
10865, 11498
10009, 10217, 10352, 10683,
10809, 10853
10009, 10217, 10683
10808, 10809, 11163, 11298
10000, 10180, 10171, 10264,
10668, 11271, 11904
10145, 10264, 10817
10860
10264, 10860
10180
10037
10037, 10370
10817
11755, 11756
10009, 10163, 10218, 10374
11447, 10047, 11454, 10000,
10051, 10451, 10093, 10180,
10060, 10178, 10030, 10092,
11922, 11917, 11347, 11147,
10625, 10560, 10335, 10035
10037, 10163, 10217, 10361
10009, 10163, 10374
10047
10109, 10287
10009
10009, 10037
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218
10808, 10865, 10880, 11217,
11298
11371
10009, 10217
10017, 10000, 10030
10060, 10886
11937
10668
10047, 10054, 10154, 10178,
10030, 10715, 10714, 10606,
10455, 10361, 10217, 10163,
10109, 10073, 10037, 10036,
10009, 10001
10487
Goodmans
Gorenje
GPM
Gradiente
Graetz
Gran Prix
Granada
Grandin
Gronic
Grundig
H
Grundy
Grunkel
Grunpy
H&B
Haaz
Haier
Haihong
Haiyan
Halifax
Hallmark
Hampton
Hanimex
Hankook
Hanseatic
Hantarex
Hantor
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Harsper
Harvard
Harwa
Harwood
Hauppauge
Havermy
HCM
Heathkit
Helios
Hello Kitty
Hema
10000, 11909, 11900, 11163,
11037, 10880, 10808, 10714,
10668, 10661, 10634, 10625,
10587, 10560, 10556, 10499,
10487, 10480, 10374, 10371,
10343, 10335, 10264, 10218,
10217, 10037, 10036, 10035,
10011, 10009
10370
10218
10053, 10037, 10170
10163, 10361, 10371, 10487,
10714, 11163
10648
10036, 10037, 10108, 10163,
10208, 10217, 10226, 10343,
10548, 10560
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218,
10374, 10455, 10610, 10668,
10714, 10715, 10865, 10880,
11037, 11191
10217
10706, 10009, 10036, 10037,
10070, 10163, 10195, 10443,
10487, 10556, 10587, 10672,
10683, 11371
10180, 10195
11163
10180
10808
10706
11034, 10037, 10508, 10587,
10698, 11017
10009
10264, 10817
10217, 10264
10236, 10180, 10178
10217
10218
10180, 10178, 10030
10009, 10037, 10217, 10361,
10370, 10394, 10499, 10556,
10634, 10661, 10714, 10808
10009, 10037, 10865
10037
10000, 10180, 10060, 10178,
10030, 11904
10054
10865
10180
10773, 11196, 11269
10009, 10037, 10487
10037
10093
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10418
10017
10865
10451
10009, 10217
Hewlett Packard
Hifivox
Highline
Hikona
Hikone
Hinari
Hisawa
Hisense
Hitachi
Hitachi Fujian
Hitec
Hitsu
Hoeher
Home Electronics
Hongmei
Hongyan
Hornyphon
Hoshai
HP
Hua Tun
Huafa
Huanghaimei
Huanghe
Huanglong
Huangshan
Huanyu
Huaqiang
Huari
Hugoson
Huodateji
Hygashi
Hyper
Hypersonic
Hypson
Hyundai
I
Iberia
ICE
ICeS
Iiyama
Ima
11494, 11502
10109
10037, 10264
10218
10218
10009, 10036, 10037, 10163,
10208, 10218, 10264, 10352,
10443
10218, 10455, 10610, 10714
10156, 10748, 10145, 10009,
10208, 10508, 10556, 10780,
10821, 10860, 11022, 11156,
11170, 11208, 11363
10047, 10054, 10017, 10000,
11256, 10156, 10051, 10150,
10178, 10030, 11145, 10145,
10092, 10744, 10877, 10634,
11037, 11137, 11149, 11156,
11170, 11225, 11576, 11904,
11960, 10578, 10548, 10508,
10499, 10481, 10480, 10343,
10217, 10163, 10109, 10108,
10037, 10036, 10035, 10009
10150, 10108, 10860
10698
10009, 10218, 10455, 10610
10714, 10865, 11163, 11556
10606
10093, 10009, 10264, 10817
10264, 10817
10037
10218, 10455
11494, 11502
10009
10145, 10009
10009
10009, 10817
10009
10009, 10264, 10817
10217, 10264, 10374, 10817
10264
10145, 10264
11217
10051
10217
10009, 10217
10361
10037, 10217, 10264, 10455,
10486, 10556, 10668, 10714,
10715, 11037
10849, 10860, 10865, 10876,
11556
10037
10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10371
10218
10877, 11217
10236, 10180, 10178
Imperial
Imperial Crown
Indiana
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Inno Hit
Innova
Innowert
Inotech
Insignia
Inteq
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITT Nokia
J
ITV
IX
JBL
JCB
JDV
Jean
JEC
Jensen
Jiahua
JiaLiCai
JIL
Jinfeng
Jinque
Jinta
Jinxing
JMB
JNC
Jocel
Johnson
Jubilee
Juhua
Jutan
10037, 10074, 10370, 10418
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374,
10661
10037
10054
11164
10163, 10487, 10610, 10714
10009
10009, 10217, 10218, 11163
10037
10865, 11298
10773, 10820
10171, 11517
10017, 10145
10009, 10037, 10264
10037, 10109, 10163, 10200,
10327, 10361, 10512
10037, 11909
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10394, 10455, 10486,
10487
10009, 10037, 10218, 10371
10037, 10218, 10455
10217
10037, 10218, 10264, 10371
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,
10480, 10548, 10610
10070, 10163, 10195, 10208,
10346, 10361, 10480, 10548,
10606, 10610
10037, 10264, 10374
10877
10054
10000
11982
10156, 10051, 10236, 10092,
10009, 10036
10035
10761, 10815, 10817, 11933
10051
10009, 10264
10030
10051, 10208, 10226, 10817
10009, 10264, 10817
10009, 10264
10054, 10156, 10145, 10009,
10037, 10264, 10556, 10698,
10817, 10821, 11011
10443, 10499, 10556, 10634
10876
10712
10455
10556
10264, 10817
10030
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
27
2007/05/11
16:05:14
JVC
K
Kaige
Kaisui
Kambrook
Kamp
Kangli
Kangyi
Kapsch
Karcher
Kathrein
Kawa
Kawasho
KB Aristocrat
KDS
KEC
Kendo
Kennedy
Kennex
Kenwood
Khind
KIC
Kiota
Kioto
Kiton
KLH
KLL
Kloss
Kneissel
Kolin
Kolster
Kongque
Konichi
Konig
Konka
Kontakt
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
Kreisen
KTV
Kuaile
Kulun
Kunlun
10054, 10093, 10463, 10053,
10030, 10070, 10036, 10218,
10371, 10418, 10508, 10606,
10650, 10653, 10683, 10731,
11253, 11923
10009, 10264, 10817
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10455
10217
10017, 10180, 10217
10001, 10009, 10264, 10374,
10661, 10817
10009, 10264
10163, 10361
10264, 10370, 10606, 10610,
10714, 10778, 11556
10556
10371
10030
10163
11498
10180, 10060
10037, 10362, 10370, 10610,
10648, 11037
10163
10668, 11037
10180, 10030
10706
10217
10001, 10371, 10455
10706, 10556
10037, 10668
10156, 10180, 10765, 10767,
11962
10037
10030
10037, 10362, 10370, 10374,
10499, 10556, 10610
10180, 10150, 10053, 10036,
10108, 11331
10037, 10218
10009, 10264, 10817
10009
10037
10180, 10037, 10218, 10371,
10418, 10587, 10641, 10714,
10817, 11084
10487
10037
10370
10037
10009
10876
10463, 10180, 10030, 10217
10009, 10264
10009
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10374, 10661, 10817
L
Kyoshu
Kyoto
L&S Electronic
Lark
LaSAT
Lavis
Leader
Lecson
Legend
Lenco
Lenoir
Lexsor
Leyco
LG
Liesenk & Tter
Liesenkotter
Lifetec
Lihua
Lloyd’s
Local India TV
Local Malaysia TV
Lodos
Loewe
Logik
Logix
Longjiang
Luker
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxor
LXI
M
M Electronic
Madison
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnasonic
10418
10163, 10217
10714, 10808, 10865
10154
10486
11037
10009
10037
10009
10037, 10374, 10587
10009
11196
10037, 10264
10054, 11265, 10060, 10178,
10030, 11758, 11637, 11191,
11178, 10856, 10715, 10714,
10700, 10698, 10556, 10370,
10361, 10217, 10163, 10109,
10108, 10037, 10009, 10001
10037
10037, 10327
10009, 10037, 10218, 10374,
10668, 10683, 10714, 11037,
11137
10817
10236, 10180, 10030, 10001,
10009, 11904
10009, 10208, 10602
10698
11037
10037, 10370, 10512, 10633,
10790
10236, 10180, 10060, 10001,
10009, 10011, 10371, 10698,
10773, 10880, 11037, 11217
10668
10264, 10817
11982
10009, 10163, 10362, 10374,
11037
10037, 10073, 10163, 10217,
10264, 10361, 10556
10009, 10037
10163, 10208, 10217, 10346,
10361, 10480, 10548, 10631,
11037, 11163
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,
10060, 10053, 10178, 10030,
10171, 10166, 10037, 10036,
10035, 10001, 10208
10009, 10037, 10109, 10163,
10195, 10217, 10287, 10343,
10346, 10374, 10480, 10512,
10634, 10661, 10714
10037
11498
10054, 10163
10073
10054, 10000, 10156, 10093,
10030, 10092, 10109
Magnavox
Magnum
Majestic
Mandor
Manesth
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
Master’s
Mastro
Masuda
Matsui
Matsushita
Maxdorf
Maxent
Maxim
MCE
Meck
Mediator
Medion
Megapower
Megas
Megatron
MEI
Meile
Memorex
Memphis
Mercury
Mermaid
Metronic
Metz
MGA
MGN Technology
Micro Genius
Micromaxx
Microstar
MicroTEK
Midland
Mikomi
10047, 11454, 10054, 10154,
10000, 10250, 10051, 10180,
10060, 10030, 10171, 10092,
10706, 11944, 11904, 11755,
11254, 10802, 10780, 10011,
10035, 10037, 10036
10037, 10648, 10714, 10715
10017
10264
10035, 10037, 10217, 10264
10037, 10668, 10778, 10876,
11037, 11267
11454, 10054, 10030, 10037,
10556, 10704, 10855
10009, 10037, 10217, 10374,
10714, 10715
10499
10053, 10706, 10698, 10780
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10371
11037, 10744, 10714, 10556,
10487, 10455, 10443, 10433,
10371, 10352, 10335, 10217,
10208, 10195, 10163, 10037,
10036, 10035, 10011, 10009
10250, 10051, 10650
10773
11755, 11756
11556, 11982
10009
10698
10037, 10556
10037, 10512, 10556, 10668,
10698, 10714, 10808, 10880,
11037, 11137, 11248, 11900
10700
10610
10047, 10178, 10145, 10009
11037
10264, 10817
10154, 10250, 10463, 10180,
10150, 10060, 10178, 10030,
10009, 10035, 10037, 10195,
10877, 11037, 11911
10009
10060, 10001, 10009, 10037
10037
10625
10037, 10195, 10367, 10388,
10447, 10587, 10668, 10746,
11163
10150, 10178, 10030, 10218,
10374
10178
10150
10037, 10668, 10714, 10808,
11037
10808
10820, 10860
10047, 10017, 10051
11037, 11149
Minato
Minerva
Minoka
Mirror
Mitsubishi
Mivar
Monaco
Monivision
Morgan’s
Motorola
MTC
MTlogic
Mudan
Multitec
Multitech
Murphy
Musikland
Mx Onda
Myryad
N
NAD
Naiko
Nakimura
Nanbao
Nansheng
Narita
NAT
National
NEC
Neckermann
NEI
Neovia
Netsat
NetTV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
Newave
Nikkai
Nikkei
Nikko
Nikkodo
10037, 10556
10070, 10108, 10195, 10487
10037
11900
10154, 10250, 10093, 10236,
10180, 11250, 10150, 10178,
10030, 11917, 11037, 10836,
10817, 10556, 10512, 10195,
10108, 10037, 10036, 10011
10217
10009
10700, 10843
10037
10054, 10051, 10093, 10150
10180, 10060, 10030, 10092,
10011, 10370, 10512
10714
10051, 10009, 10208, 10226,
10264, 10817
10037, 10486, 10668, 11037,
11556
10180, 10009, 10037, 10217,
10264, 10370, 10486
10163
10218
11498
10556
10156, 10178, 10166, 10037,
10361, 10866, 11156
10037, 10606, 11982
10037, 10374
10009, 10264
10264, 10817
11982
10226
10051, 10208, 10226, 10508
10047, 10154, 10156, 10051,
10053, 10178, 10030, 11704,
11270, 11170, 10817, 10704,
10661, 10653, 10508, 10499,
10455, 10374, 10264, 10217,
10170, 10036, 10011, 10009
10037, 10200, 10327, 10370,
10418, 10556
10037, 10163, 10371
10865, 10876, 11371
10037
11755
10009, 10037, 10218, 10556,
10610, 10714
10009, 10037, 10217, 10343,
10556
10218
10093, 10178, 10092, 10009
10009, 10035, 10036, 10037,
10163, 10217, 10218, 10264
10714
10178, 10030, 10092
10178, 10030, 10092
Nishi
Nobliko
Nogamatic
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
O
Normerel
Novatronic
NTC
Nu-Tec
Nyon
Oceanic
Odeon
Okano
Olevia
Omega
Omni
Onida
Onimax
Onwa
Opera
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit
Orcom
Orion
Orline
Ormond
Osaki
Osio
Oso
Osume
Otic
Otto Versand
P
Pace
Pacific
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panashiba
10030
10070
10109
10163, 10208, 10346, 10361,
10374, 10480, 10548, 10606,
10610, 10631
10748, 10824
10217
10037, 10109, 10195, 10287,
10343, 10560, 10714
10037
10037, 10374
10092
10455, 10698, 10820
10000
10163, 10208, 10361, 10548
10264
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370
11144, 11240, 11331, 11610
10264
10748, 10698, 10780, 10872
10053, 11253
10714
10180, 10218, 10371, 10433,
10602
10037
10154, 10250, 10093, 10180,
10150, 10178, 10030, 10166,
10650
10887
10093
10037
11504
10017, 10236, 10463, 10180,
10178, 11463, 10011, 10037,
10264, 10443, 10556, 10714,
10880, 11196, 11911
10037, 10218
10668, 11037
10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,
10374, 10556
10037
10218
10036, 10037, 10218
11498
10093, 10036, 10037, 10109,
10195, 10217, 10226, 10343,
10361, 10512, 10556
10092
10037, 10443, 10556, 10714,
11037, 11137
10037, 10163, 10200, 10217,
10327, 10370, 10418, 10556,
10714, 11137
10001, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10418, 10698, 10773,
10778, 11196, 11269, 11904
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
10001
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
28
2007/05/11
16:05:15
Panasonic
Panavision
Panda
Pathe Cinema
Pathe Marconi
Pausa
Paxonic
PCE
Penney
Perdio
Perfekt
Petters
Philco
Philharmonic
Philips
Phocus
Phoenix
Phonola
Pilot
Pioneer
Pionier
Plantron
Playsonic
Polaroid
Poppy
Portland
Powerpoint
Prandoni-Prince
Precision
Premier
President
Prima
Princeton
Prinston
Prinz
Prism
10054, 10000, 10156, 10250,
10051, 10236, 10030, 11947,
11946, 11941, 11480, 11310,
11291, 11271, 10853, 10650,
10548, 10508, 10367, 10361,
10226, 10208, 10163, 10108,
10037, 10035
10037
10051, 10706, 10009, 10208,
10226, 10264, 10508, 10698,
10780, 10817, 10821
10163
10109
10009
10060, 10030
Profex
Profi
Profilo
Profitronic
10156, 10060
10047, 10000, 10156, 10250,
10051, 10060, 10178, 10030,
10035, 10036, 10037, 10070,
10108, 11347
10037, 10163
10037
11523
10054, 10451, 10463, 10180,
10178, 10030, 10145, 11661,
10037, 10074, 10163, 10370,
10418
10217
11454, 10054, 10017, 10000,
10051, 10178, 10030, 10171,
10092, 11961, 11756, 11254,
10690, 10556, 10512, 10374,
10361, 10343, 10200, 10108,
10037, 10009
10714
10037, 10163, 10370, 10486
10037, 10556
10051, 10060, 10178, 10030,
10706, 10011
10166, 10011, 10037, 10109,
10163, 10170, 10287, 10361,
10370, 10486, 10512, 10679,
10760, 10866, 11260
10370, 10486, 11556
10009, 10037, 10264
10037, 10217, 10714, 10715
10765, 10865, 11276, 11316,
11341, 11498, 11523
10009
10451, 10092, 10374
10037, 10487, 10698
10361
10236, 10180, 10217
10009, 10264
10860
10761, 10009, 10264, 10783,
10815, 10817, 11269, 11933
10700
11037
10361
10250, 10051
Relisys
Proton
10009, 10163, 10361
10009
11556
10037
10037, 10073, 10625, 10634,
11037
11447, 10047, 11347, 11922
10156
10037, 10217, 10370, 10371,
10374, 10668, 10714
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264,
10418, 10486, 10668, 11037
10178, 10030, 10001, 10009
Proview
11498
Rowa
ProVision
Pulsar
Pulser
Pvision
Pye
Pymi
10037, 10556, 10714, 11037
10017, 10092
10178, 10092
10876, 11191
10037, 10374, 10556
10009
10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10817
10051, 10218
10150, 10178
10250, 10051, 10009, 10035,
10650, 10865
10011, 10037, 10070, 10074,
10109, 10195, 10200, 10327,
10361, 10512, 10668, 11037
10036
10036
10037
10047
10163, 10218
10037, 10217, 10556
10037
10047, 10154, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10030, 10037, 11904
10009, 10037, 10264, 10370,
10418, 10648, 10668, 11037
10070
10036, 10602
10070
11447, 10047, 11454, 10054,
10000, 10051, 10093, 10178,
10030, 10092, 11958, 11953,
11948, 11922, 11917, 11547,
11347, 11247, 11147, 11047,
10679, 10625, 10560, 10090
10047, 10154, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10030
10037, 10418
10037
10036, 10163, 10346, 10361,
10548
10037
10037, 10668, 11037
Royal Lux
Runco
Ruyi
Proline
Proscan
Prosco
Prosonic
Protec
Protech
Q
Qingdao
Quadral
Quartz
Quasar
Quelle
R
Questa
Questar
R-Line
Rabbit
Radialva
Radiola
Radiomarelli
RadioShack
Radiotone
Rank
Rank Arena
RBM
RCA
Realistic
Recor
Rectiligne
Rediffusion
Redstar
Reflex
Remotec
Reoc
Revox
Rex
RFT
Rinex
Roadstar
Rolson
Rover
S
Saba
Sagem
Saige
Saisho
Saivod
Sakai
Sakyno
Salora
Salsa
Sampo
Samsung
Sandra
Sanjian
Sanky
Sansui
Santon
Sanyo
Sanyong
Sanyuan
10865, 10876, 10877, 11207,
11298
10250, 10093, 10145, 10171,
10037
10714
10037
10163, 10264
10037, 10264
10773
10009, 10037, 10218, 10264,
10418, 10668, 10714, 11037,
11900
11371
10036, 10877
10748, 10009, 10037, 10264,
10587, 10698, 10712, 10817
10335, 10370
10017, 10060, 10030
10817
10250, 10109, 10163, 10287,
10335, 10343, 10361, 10498,
10548, 10560, 10625, 10714
10455, 10610, 10618
10009, 10817
10009, 10011, 10163, 10217,
10264
10037, 10668, 10712, 11037,
11163, 11556, 11982
10163
10455
10163, 10208, 10361, 10480,
10548, 10631
10335
10047, 10154, 10093, 10178,
10030, 10171, 10092, 10009,
10036, 10650, 10700, 11755,
11756
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10156, 10093, 10060, 10812,
10702, 10178, 10030, 10092,
10814, 10766, 10718, 10618,
10587, 10817, 10821, 11060,
11249, 11312, 11903, 11959,
10556, 10371, 10370, 10362,
10264, 10226, 10217, 10208,
10163, 10090, 10037, 10036,
10035, 10009
10217
10264
10060, 10030
10463, 10060, 10030, 10706,
10037, 10371, 10455, 10602,
10714, 10861, 11371, 11537,
11904, 11911
10009
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10156, 10463, 10180, 10145,
10171, 11755, 11208, 10704,
10508, 10370, 10264, 10217,
10208, 10170, 10163, 10108,
10088, 10037, 10036, 10011,
10009
10037
10093, 10009, 10817
Saville
SBR
Sceptre
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scotch
Scotland
Scott
Sears
Seaway
Seelver
SEG
SEI
Sei-Sinudyne
Seleco
Semivox
Semp
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Shancha
Shanghai
Shaofeng
Sharp
Shen Ying
Shencai
Sheng Chia
Shenyang
Sherwood
Shintoshi
Shivaki
Show
Siarem
Siemens
Siera
Siesta
Signature
Silva
Silva Schneider
Silvano
Silver
10060
10037, 10556
11217
10361, 10374, 10486, 10548,
10606, 10714, 11191
11982, 11904, 11137, 11037,
10714, 10668, 10648, 10556,
10394, 10371, 10361, 10352,
10343, 10218, 10217, 10163,
10070, 10037
10178
10163
10236, 10180, 10178, 10030
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,
10060, 10053, 10178, 10030,
10171, 10166, 10035, 10036,
10037, 10001, 10208, 11904
10634
11037
10009, 10036, 10037, 10217,
10218, 10264, 10362, 10487,
10668, 11037, 11163
10037, 10163
10037
10163, 10264, 10346, 10362,
10371
10180
10156
10009
10035
10093, 10455, 10610
10264, 10817
10009, 10208, 10226, 10264,
10817
10145, 10817
10054, 10093, 10180, 10053,
10030, 10009, 10036, 10200,
10650, 10653, 10668, 11193,
11393, 11917
10092, 10009
10145, 10009, 10264
10093, 10236, 10009
10009, 10264, 10817
10009
10037
10178, 10037, 10374, 10443,
10556
10009, 10418
10163
10145, 10037, 10195, 10200,
10327
10037, 10556
10370
10047, 10093, 10030
10037, 10361, 10648
10037, 11556
10587
10036, 10361, 10455, 10715
SilverCrest
Simpson
11037
10178, 10030, 10011
10060, 10092, 10009, 10037,
Singer
10335, 10371, 10433, 11537
Sinotec
10773
Sinudyne
10037, 10163, 10361
Skantic
10163
SKY
10037, 10880, 11504
Sky Brazil
10880
Sky-North
10037
Skygiant
10180
10748, 10009, 10037, 10264,
Skyworth
10698, 10805, 10817, 11115
Sliding
10865, 10880
SLX
10668
Smaragd
10487
Soemtron
10865, 11298
Solar Drape
10000
Solavox
10037, 10163, 10361, 10548
Sole
10813
Sonawa
10218
Songba
10009
Soniko
10037
Sonitron
10208, 10217, 10370
Sonneclair
10037
Sonoko
10009, 10037, 10217, 10264
Sonolor
10163, 10208, 10361, 10548
Sontec
10009, 10037, 10370
10017, 10154, 11100, 10000,
10150, 10053, 10011, 10036,
Sony
10037, 10074, 10353, 10650,
11505, 11651, 11751, 11904
Sound & Vision
10218, 10374
Soundesign
10180, 10178
Soundwave
10037, 10418, 10715
Sova
11952
10156, 10051, 10060, 10178,
Sowa
10092, 10036, 10226
Soyea
10773
Spectra
10009
Spectravision
10156, 10178
Spectroniq
11498
Squareview
10171
SR2000
10154, 10171
Ssangyong
10009
SSS
10180
Staksonic
10009
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
Standard
10374, 11037
Standard Components 10009, 10218
10236, 10180, 10009, 10037,
Starlite
10163, 10264
Stenway
10218
Stern
10163, 10264
Stevison
11982
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
29
2007/05/11
16:05:16
Strato
Strong
Studio Experience
Stylandia
Sunkai
Sunstar
Sunwatt
Sunwood
Superla
Superscan
Supersonic
SuperTech
Supra
Supreme
Susumu
Sutron
SV2000
SVA
Svasa
Swisstec
Sydney
Sylvania
Symphonic
Synco
T
Syntax
Sysline
T+A
Tacico
Tai Yi
Taishan
Tandberg
Tandy
Targa
Tashiko
Tatung
TCL
TCM
Teac
Tec
Tech Line
Techica
Technica
10009, 10037, 10264
11149, 11163
10843
10217
10218, 10455, 10487, 10610,
10865
10009, 10037, 10264, 10371
10455
10037
10217
10093, 10864, 11944
10009, 10208, 10455, 10805
10009, 10037, 10218, 10556
10178, 10009, 10374
10000
10218, 10287, 10335
10009
10054
10748, 10587, 10865, 10870,
10871, 10872
10455
10880, 11504
10217
10047, 10054, 10154, 10000,
10051, 10178, 10030, 10171,
10092, 10036, 10037, 10876,
11271, 11904, 11944
10000, 10180, 10178, 10171,
11904, 11944
10000, 10451, 10093, 10060,
10178, 10092, 10036
11144, 11240, 11331
10037
10447
10178, 10092, 10009
10009
10009, 10374, 10817
10109, 10361, 10367
10093, 10163, 10217, 10218
11371
10092, 10036, 10163, 10170,
10217, 10650
10054, 10154, 10000, 10156,
10051, 10060, 10037, 10036,
10011, 10009, 10217, 11156,
11191, 11248, 11254, 11371,
11556, 11756
10706, 10698, 11027, 11537
10714, 10808
10154, 10178, 10171, 10706,
11755, 11149, 11037, 10714,
10712, 10698, 10668, 10512,
10455, 10418, 10264, 10217,
10170, 10037, 10009
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,
10335
10037, 10668, 11163
10218
11982
Technics
TechniSat
Technisson
Technosonic
Technovox
Techview
Techwood
Tecnimagen
Teco
Tedelex
Teiron
Tek
Teknika
Tele System
Electronic
Teleavia
Telecolor
Telecor
Telefunken
Telefusion
Telegazi
Telemeister
Telesonic
Telestar
Teletech
Teleton
Televideon
Teleview
Tempest
Tennessee
Tensai
Tenson
Tera
Tevion
Texet
Texla
ThemeScene
Thomas
Thomson
Thorn
Thorn-Ferguson
10054, 10250, 10051, 10226,
10556, 10650
10556, 11267
10714
10499, 10556
10030, 10217
10847
10250, 10051, 10060, 11163
10556
10051, 10093, 10178, 10092,
10009, 10036, 10218, 10264,
10653, 11040
10009, 10208, 10217, 10418,
10606, 10698, 11537
10009
10820
10054, 10463, 10180, 10150,
10060, 10178, 10092
Tiane
Tiny
TMK
TML
TNCi
Tobishi
Tobo
Tocom
Tokai
Tokaido
Tokyo
Tomashi
Tongguang
Tongtel
Topline
10876
10287, 10343
10017
10037, 10163, 10217, 10218,
10394
10702, 11504, 10821, 10820,
10819, 10714, 10712, 10698,
10625, 10587, 10560, 10498,
10486, 10346, 10343, 10335,
10287, 10109, 10074, 10073,
10037
10037
10037, 10163, 10218, 10264
10037
10037
10009, 10037, 10556
10009, 10037, 10668, 11037
10036, 10217
10163
10037
10009, 10264, 10455
10037
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10371, 10374, 10715, 11037
10009
10030, 10092
10037, 10556, 10648, 10668,
10714, 10808, 11037, 11137,
11248, 11298, 11498, 11556
10009, 10217, 10218, 10374
10780
10887
10047, 10178, 10001, 11904
11447, 10047, 10037, 10109,
10287, 10335, 10343, 10560,
10625
10035, 10036, 10037, 10073,
10074, 10109, 10163, 10264,
10335, 10343, 10361, 10499,
10512
10073, 10335, 10343, 10499
Toshiba
Totevision
Towada
Toyoda
Toyomenka
Trakton
Trans Continens
TRANS-continents
Transonic
Triad
Trident
Trio
Tristar
Triumph
Truetone
Tuntex
TVS
TVTEXT 95
U
Uher
Ultra
Ultravox
Unic Line
United
Universal
Universum
10093, 10817
11269
10236, 10180, 10178
11756
10017
10218
10748, 10009, 10264
10156
10009, 10037, 10163, 10217,
10374, 10668, 11037
11037
10035
10218
10264
10587, 10780
10668, 11037
10154, 11256, 10156, 10150,
11265, 10060, 11145, 10145,
10166, 11037, 11156, 11163,
11164, 11356, 11508, 11556,
11656, 11704, 11945, 11971,
10845, 10821, 10718, 10650,
10618, 10508, 10264, 10217,
10195, 10109, 10070, 10036,
10035, 10011, 10009
10051
10217
10009, 10264, 10371
10178
10217, 10264
10037, 10217, 10668, 11037
10556, 10865
10009, 10037, 10264, 10418,
10455, 10512, 10587, 10698,
10712, 10780
10218, 10556
10217
11498
10218, 10264
10037, 10346, 10556
10250, 10051
10030, 10092, 10009
10463
10556
10037, 10370, 10374, 10418,
10480, 10486
10092
10037, 10163, 10374
10037, 10455
10037, 10587, 10714, 10715,
11037, 11982
10047, 10037
11163, 11037, 10668, 10631,
10618, 10512, 10480, 10418,
10370, 10362, 10361, 10346,
10327, 10264, 10217, 10200,
10195, 10170, 10109, 10074,
10070, 10037, 10036, 10011,
10009
V
Univox
V
V2max
V7 Videoseven
Vector Research
Vestel
Vexa
Victor
Videocon
Videologic
Videologique
Videomac
VideoSystem
Videotechnic
Videoton
Vidikron
Vidtech
Viewpia
Viewsonic
Viking
Viore
Vision
Vizio
Vortec
Voxson
W
Waltham
Wards
Warumaia
Watson
Watt Radio
Waycon
Wega
Wegavox
Weipai
Welltech
Weltblick
Welton
Weltstar
Westinghouse
Wharfedale
White
Westinghouse
Windsor
Windy Sam
Wintel
10037, 10163
10864, 10885, 11755, 11756
10865
10880, 11217, 11755
10030
10037, 10217, 10668, 11037,
11163
10009, 10037
10250, 10053, 10036, 10650,
10653
10508
10218
10217, 10218
10009
10037
10217, 10374
10163
10054
10178, 10036
10876
10857, 10864, 10885, 11330,
11578, 11627, 11755
10060
11207
10037, 10217, 10264
10864, 10885, 11755, 11756,
11758
10037
10178, 10037, 10163, 10418
10037, 10109, 10217, 10418,
10443, 10668, 11037
10047, 10054, 10017, 10154,
10000, 10156, 10051, 10093,
10236, 10180, 10060, 10178,
10030, 10166, 11347, 11156,
11147, 10866, 10195, 10001,
10037, 10035
10374, 10661
10009, 10037, 10163, 10218,
10394, 10668, 10714, 11037
10163
10156
10036, 10037
10009
10009
10714
10217
10178
11037
10000, 10451, 10885, 10889,
11282, 11577
10037, 10556, 10860, 11556
10451, 10236, 10463, 10037,
10623, 10889, 11909
10668, 11037
10556
10714
World
World-of-Vision
X
Worldview
X-View
Xenius
Xiahua
Y
Xianghai
Xiangyang
Xiangyu
Xihu
Xingfu
Xinghai
XLogic
Xoceco
Xoro
XR-1000
Xrypton
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yapshe
Yingge
Yokan
Yoko
Z
Yonggu
Yorx
Youlanasi
Yousida
Yuhang
Zanussi
Zenith
ZhuHai
10451, 10236, 10463, 10180
10865, 10877, 10880, 11217,
11298
10455
11191
10634, 10661
10009, 10264, 10698, 10773,
10817
10009
10264
10009
10264, 10817
10009
10264
10698, 10860
11064
11196, 11217
10154, 10180, 10171
10037
10030, 10650, 11576
10037, 10217, 10218, 10455
10250
10009
10037
10009, 10037, 10217, 10218,
10264, 10370
10009
10030, 10218
10817
10009
10009
10163, 10217, 10264
10047, 10017, 10000, 10093,
10463, 11265, 10812, 10178,
10030, 11145, 10145, 10171,
10092, 10037, 11904, 11909,
11911
10009, 10374
TV/DVD Combination
A
B
C
D
Advent
Akai
Akura
Alba
Amstrad
Apex Digital
Audiovox
Axion
Black Diamond
Bush
Centrum
Crown
D-Vision
Denver
11933
11675
11982
11037
11982
11943
11937, 11951, 11952
11937, 11958
11037
10698, 11037, 11900
11037
11037
11982
10587
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
30
2007/05/11
16:05:17
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
V
Elfunk
Ferguson
Finlux
Goodmans
Hitachi
JDV
Jensen
KLH
Lenco
Logik
Luker
Luxor
Matsui
Maxim
Medion
Mirror
Naiko
Narita
Panasonic
Philips
Powerpoint
Prima
RCA
Roadstar
Saivod
Samsung
Schneider
SEG
Sova
Stevison
Sylvania
Teac
Technica
Telefunken
Thomson
Transonic
United
Vestel
11037
11037
11556
10587, 11037, 11900
11960
11982
11933
11962
10587
11037
11982
11037
11037
11982
11900
11900
11982
11982
11941
11454, 10556, 11961
10698
11933
11948, 11958
11900
11982
11903
11982
11037
11952
11982
10171
10698
11982
10698
10625
10587
10587, 11037, 11982
11037
F
G
H
I
J
L
M
O
P
Q
R
B
C
D
E
Aiwa
America Action
Amstrad
Audiovox
Beko
Black Diamond
Broksonic
Bush
Curtis Mathes
Daewoo
Emerson
11904, 11911
10180
10171
10180
10486
11909
10463, 11911
11556
10051
11909
10236, 10463, 11909, 11911
GE
GoldStar
Goodmans
Grundig
Harley Davidson
Hinari
Hitachi
Internal
JVC
LG
Lloyd’s
Magnavox
Memorex
Mitsubishi
Orion
Palsonic
Panasonic
Penney
Philips
Quasar
Radiola
RadioShack
RCA
S
T
TV/VCR Combination
A
Ferguson
Fidelity
Funai
W
Z
Saba
Samsung
Sansui
Schneider
Sears
Sharp
Siemens
Sony
Sylvania
Symphonic
Teac
Technics
Thomas
Thomson
Toshiba
White
Westinghouse
Zenith
10073, 10625
10171
11904
10047, 10051, 10093, 11917,
11922
10037
10374, 11909
10037, 10195, 10556
11904
10036
11904
11909
11923
10178
11904
10054, 11904
10250
10093, 10556, 11917
10463, 11911
11904
10250, 10051
10051
10037, 10556
10250, 10051
10556
11904
10047, 10051, 10093, 11917,
11922
10625
11959
10463, 11904, 11911
10037, 10556, 11904
11904
10093, 11917
10037
10000, 11505, 11904
10054
11904
10178, 10171
10556
11904
10625
11971
Akai
Broksonic
Emerson
ESA
T
A
A-Mark
ABS
Admiral
Adventura
Aiko
Aim
Aiwa
Akai
Akura
Alba
Alienware
Allegro
Allorgan
Allstar
America Action
American High
Amoisonic
Amstrad
Anam
Anam National
Ansonic
Aristona
ASA
Asha
Astra
Asuka
Audiolab
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Avis
AVP
Awa
11904, 11909, 11911
11903
11938
11944
11944
Magnavox
Panasonic
RCA
Sharp
Sylvania
Symphonic
Toshiba
11944
11946, 11947
11953
11917
11944
11944
11945
Bestar
Black Diamond
Black Panther
Blaupunkt
VCR
11909
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
A
B
E
M
P
R
S
B
Baird
Basic Line
Beaumark
Beko
Bell & Howell
20037, 20240, 20000, 20278,
20046
21972
20060, 20048, 20039, 20047,
20104, 20121, 20209, 20479
20037, 20240, 20000
20278
20278, 20348, 20642
20037, 20032, 20000, 20209,
20041, 20348, 20352, 20479,
20742, 21137
20037, 20240, 20041, 20106,
20315, 20348, 20352, 20642
20041
20081, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20315, 20348, 20352
21972
20039, 21137
20240
20081
20278
20035, 20081
20479
20000, 20278
20162, 20037, 20240, 20278,
20226, 20480
20162, 20226, 21162, 21562
20000
20081
20037, 20081
20240
20035, 20240
20037, 20081, 20000, 20038
20081
20278
20037, 20278, 20038
20000
20000, 20352
20037, 20043, 20278, 20642
20000, 20104, 20041, 20278,
20046, 20106
20104, 20278, 20046
20240
20104
20035, 20048, 20039, 20000,
20104, 20046, 20479
C
D
20278
20642
20278
20162, 20081, 20226
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348,
Blue Sky
20352, 20480, 20642, 20742,
21137
BPL
20046
Brandt
20041, 20320
Brandt Electronique 20041
Brinkmann
20209, 20348
20184, 20121, 20209, 20002,
Broksonic
20348, 20479, 21479
20081, 20000, 20209, 20278,
Bush
20315, 20348, 20352, 20642,
20742
Calix
20037
Candle
20037, 20038
Canon
20035
Capehart
20002
Carena
20081, 20209
Carrefour
20045
Carrera
20240
Carver
20035, 20081
Casio
20000
Cathay
20278
CCE
20278
CGE
20000, 20041
Changhong
20048, 20081
Cimline
20209
Cineral
20278
CineVision
21137
20035, 20037, 20240, 20000,
Citizen
20209, 20278, 20479, 21278
Classic
20037
Clatronic
20000, 21593
Colortyme
20060, 20035, 20045, 20278
Colt
20000
Combitech
20352
Condor
20278
Craig
20037, 20047, 20240
Criterion
20000
Crosley
20035, 20081, 20000
Crown
20037, 20278, 20480
20060, 20035, 20162, 20240,
Curtis Mathes
20000, 20041, 20278, 20432,
21035
Cybernex
20240
CyberPower
21972
Cyrus
20081
20037, 20045, 20104, 20209,
Daewoo
20278, 20046, 20352, 20637,
20642, 21137, 21278
Dansai
20278
Dantax
20352
Daytron
20037, 20278
De Graaf
Decca
Degraff
Deitron
Dell
Denon
Derwent
Diamant
Diamond
Digitor
DirecTV
Domland
DSE
Dual
E
Dumont
Durabrand
Dynatech
Elbe
Electrohome
Electrophonic
Elin
Elta
Emerald
Emerex
Emerson
ESA
ESC
EuroLine
F
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
Firstline
Fisher
G
Flint
Fuji
Fujitsu
Fujitsu General
Funai
Galaxi
Galaxis
Garrard
Gateway
20048, 20081, 20042, 20104,
20046
20081, 20000, 20067, 20209,
20041, 20352
20048, 20081, 20042, 20104
20278
21972
20081, 20042
20041
20037
20348
20642
20739
20209
20642
20081, 20000, 20041, 20278,
20348
20081, 20000, 20104
20039, 20038, 20642
20240, 20000
20278, 20038
20060, 20037, 20240, 20000,
20043, 20209
20037
20240
20278
20184, 20121
20032
20035, 20037, 20184, 20039,
20240, 20045, 20000, 20121,
20043, 20209, 20002, 20278,
20348, 20479, 20637, 21278,
21479, 21593
21137
20240, 20278
21593
20000, 20041, 20278, 20320,
20348
20240, 20000, 20352, 20432
20037, 20048, 20081, 20000,
20042, 20104, 20043, 20046,
20106, 20226
20081, 20000, 20042, 20104
20037, 20045, 20042, 20043,
20209, 20278, 20348, 20480,
21137
20039, 20047, 20000, 20104,
20046
20209, 20348
20035, 20033
20037, 20045, 20000
20037
20037, 20000, 20278, 21593
20000
20278
20000
21972
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
31
10
2007/05/11
16:05:18
GE
GEC
Gemini
General
General Technic
Genexxa
Go Video
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX
Gradiente
Graetz
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
H
Haaz
Hanimex
Hanseatic
Haojie
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Headquarter
Hewlett Packard
HI-Q
Hinari
Hisawa
Hischito
Hitachi
Hoeher
Hornyphon
Howard Computers
HP
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
Hush
Hypson
I
11
Hytek
iBUYPOWER
Imperial
Ingersol
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20000, 20226, 20320, 20807,
21035, 21060
20081
20060
20045
20348
20037, 20000, 20104, 20278
20240, 20432, 20614, 21137
20035, 20037, 20039, 20000,
20209, 20278, 20038, 20225,
20226, 20480, 21137, 21237
20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,
20209, 20278, 20348, 20352,
20637, 20642, 20742
20037
20000
20240, 20104, 20041
20035, 20037, 20048, 20081,
20240, 20000, 20042, 20104,
20046, 20226
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20742
20081, 20226, 20320, 20347,
20348, 20352, 20742
20348
20352
20037, 20081, 20209, 20038
20240
20000
20081, 20038
20046
21972
20035, 20047, 20000
20240, 20209, 20041, 20278,
20352
20209, 2035
20045
20035, 20037, 20081, 20240,
20045, 20000, 20042, 20041,
20046, 20089
20278, 20642
20081
21972
21972
International
Intervision
Irradio
ITT
J
ITT Nokia
ITV
Janeil
JBL
Jensen
JMB
Joyce
JVC
K
Kambrook
Karcher
KEC
Kendo
Kenwood
KIC
Kimari
Kneissel
L
Kodak
Kolin
Kolster
KTV
Kuba
Kuba Electronic
Lenco
LG
Lifetec
Linksys
Lloyd’s
Loewe
Logik
Lumatron
Lunatron
20042, 20739
Luxor
20739
21972
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20352, 20480
20047, 20000
21972
20000
20240, 20209
20037
20081, 20104
20278, 20637
LXI
M Electronic
Magnadyne
M
Magnasonic
Magnavox
Magnin
Magnum
Manesth
Marantz
20037, 20278, 20642
20037, 20000, 20209, 20278,
20348
20037, 20081, 21137
20240, 20104, 20041, 20046,
20106
20240, 20104, 20041, 20106
20037, 20278
20240
20278
20067, 20041
20209, 20348, 20352, 20742
20000
20184, 20081, 20045, 20067,
20041, 21162
20037
20081, 20278, 20642
20037, 20278
20037, 20209, 20278, 20106,
20315, 20348, 20642
20067, 20041, 20038, 20046
20000
20047
20037, 20209, 20278, 20348,
20352
20035, 20037
20043, 20041
20209
20000
20047
20047
20278
20037, 20240, 20045, 20000,
20042, 20209, 20278, 20038,
20225, 20480, 21137, 21237
20209, 20348
21972
20240, 20000, 20038
21062, 20162, 20037, 20081,
21262, 21562
20240, 20000, 20209, 20106
20278, 21137
21137
20048, 20047, 20104, 20043,
20046, 20106, 20315
20037, 20000, 20042, 20067
20037, 20240, 20000, 20038
20081
20037, 20240, 20000, 20278,
21278
20035, 20037, 20048, 20039,
20081, 20240, 20000, 20226,
20618, 20642, 21593, 21781
20240
20642
20081, 20045, 20209
20035, 20081, 20209, 20038
Mark
Marta
Mastec
Master’s
Matsui
Matsushita
Media Center PC
Mediator
Medion
MEI
Memorex
Metronic
Metz
MGA
MGN Technology
Micormay
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Midland
Migros
Mind
Minolta
Mitsubishi
N
Motorola
MTC
MTX
Multitec
Multitech
Murphy
Myryad
NAD
Naiko
NAP
National
Nebula Electronics
NEC
Neckermann
Nesco
Neufunk
Newave
Nikkai
Nikko
Nikkodo
Nishi
Niveus Media
20000, 20278
20037
20642
20278
20037, 20240, 20209, 20278,
20348, 20352, 20742
20035, 20162, 20081, 20226,
21162
21972
20081
20209, 20348, 20352, 20642
20035
20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,
20039, 20047, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20209, 20278, 20046,
20348, 20479, 21162, 21237,
21262
20081
21062, 20162, 20037, 20081,
20226, 20347, 20836, 21162,
21262, 21562
20060, 20240, 20043
20240
20348
20209
21972
20240
20000
21972
20042
20060, 20048, 20047, 20081,
20000, 20042, 20067, 20043,
20041, 20480, 20642, 20807
20035, 20048
20240, 20000
20000
20037
20039, 20000
20000
20081
20240, 20104
20348, 20642
20039
20226
20033
20035, 20037, 20048, 20104,
20067, 20041, 20278, 20038,
21137
20081, 20041
20000
20209
20037
20278
20037, 20278
20037, 20278
20240
21972
Noblex
Nokia
Nordmende
Northgate
Nu-Tec
O
Oceanic
Okano
Olympus
Onimax
Onkyo
Optimus
Orion
P
Orson
Osaki
Otake
Otto Versand
Pace
Pacific
Packard Bell
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
Panasonic
Pathe Cinema
Pathe Marconi
Penney
Pentax
Perdio
Philco
Philips
Phoenix
Phonola
Pilot
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Portland
Presidian
Prinz
Profitronic
Proline
Proscan
20240
20048, 20081, 20240, 20042,
20104, 20041, 20278, 20046,
20106, 20315
20067, 20041, 20320
21972
20209
20048, 20081, 20000, 20104,
20041, 20046, 20106
20209, 20278, 20315, 20348
20035, 20162, 20104, 20226
20642
20222
21062, 20035, 20162, 20037,
20048, 20047, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20432, 21162, 21262
20184, 20240, 20000, 20104,
20121, 20209, 20002, 20278,
20348, 20352, 20479, 20742,
21479
20000
20037, 20000
20209
20081
20352
20000, 20348, 20642, 20742
21972
20037, 20209, 20041, 20348
20000, 20642
20035
21062, 20035, 20162, 20000,
20225, 20226, 20614, 20616,
20836, 21035, 21162, 21262,
21562
20043
20041
20035, 20162, 20037, 20047,
20081, 20240, 20000, 20042,
20067, 20038, 21035, 21237
20042
20000, 20209
20035, 20081, 20000, 20209,
20038, 20226, 20479
20035, 20162, 20048, 20081,
20045, 20000, 20209, 20226,
20616, 20618, 20739, 21081,
21181
20278
20081
20037
20162, 20081, 20042, 20067
20081
20278, 20637
21593
20000
20081, 20240
20000, 20278, 20320, 20642
20060, 21060
Q
Prosco
Prosonic
Protec
Protech
ProVision
Pulsar
Pulser
Pye
Qisheng
Quarter
Quartz
Quasar
R
Quelle
Radialva
Radiola
Radionette
RadioShack
Radix
Randex
Rank
Rank Arena
RCA
Realistic
Reoc
ReplayTV
Rex
Ricavision
Rio
Roadstar
S
Runco
Saba
Saisho
Salora
Sampo
Samsung
Samtron
Sanky
Sansei
Sansui
Sanyo
Saville
SBR
ScanSonic
20278
20209, 20278
20000
20081
20278
20039, 20240, 20278
20240
20081, 20000
20060
20046
20035, 20047, 20046
20035, 20162, 20002, 20278,
20226, 21035, 21162
20081
20037, 20048, 20081
20081
20037, 21137
20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,
20047, 20240, 20000, 20104,
20046, 21162
20037
20037
20041
20041
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20045, 20000, 20042, 20106,
20226, 20320, 20807, 20880,
21035, 21060
20035, 20162, 20037, 20048,
20047, 20240, 20000, 20104,
20121, 20278, 20046, 21162
20348
20614, 20616
20041
21972
21137
20037, 20081, 20240, 20278,
20038, 20742
20039
20041, 20278, 20320
20209, 20348
20104, 20043, 20046, 20106
20037, 20048
20060, 20240, 20045, 20000,
20038, 20432, 20739, 21014
20240
20048, 20039
20048
20240, 20000, 20067, 20209,
20041, 20002, 20106, 20348,
20479, 21479
20048, 20047, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20067, 20209, 20046,
20348, 20479, 21137
20240, 20278, 20352
20081
20240
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
32
2007/05/11
16:05:20
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scott
Sears
Seaway
SEG
SEI
Sei-Sinudyne
Seleco
Semp
Sentra
Sharp
Shinco
Shintom
Shivaki
Shogun
Siemens
Siera
Signature
Silva
Silver
SilverCrest
Singer
Sinudyne
Smaragd
Sonic Blue
Sonographe
Sonolor
Sontec
Sonwa
Sony
Soundmaster
Soundwave
Stack 9
Standard
Stern
STS
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Supra
Susumu
SV2000
SVA
20000, 20104, 20041, 20106,
20315, 20348
20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,
20042, 20278, 20348, 20352,
20642, 21137
20184, 20045, 20121, 20043
20060, 20035, 20162, 20037,
20048, 20039, 20047, 20033,
20045, 20000, 20042, 20104,
20067, 20043, 20209, 20041,
21237, 20046
20278
20081, 20240, 20278, 20637,
20642
20081
20081
20037, 20041
20045
20278
20037, 20048, 20047, 20032,
20000, 20209, 20807
20000
20039, 20240, 20000, 20104
20037
20240
20037, 20081, 20104, 20046,
20320, 20347
20081
20060, 20035, 20037, 20048,
20000, 20046, 20479
20037
20278
20642
20037, 20240, 20045, 20348
20081, 20209, 20352
20348
20614, 20616, 21137
20046
20048, 20046
20037, 20278
20642
20035, 20048, 20047, 20032,
20033, 20000, 20067, 20046,
20106, 20226, 20636, 21232,
21972
20000
20037, 20209, 20348
21972
20278
20278
20042
20209, 20278, 20348
20000
20000
20037, 20278, 20348
20037
20000
20000
Sylvania
T
Symphonic
Systemax
T+A
Tagar Systems
Taisho
Tandberg
Tandy
Tashiko
Tatung
Tchibo
TCM
Teac
Technics
TechniSat
Technosonic
Teco
Tedelex
Teknika
Teleavia
Telecorder
Telefunken
Telerent
Telestar
Teletech
Tensai
Tevion
Texet
Thomas
Thomson
Thorn
Tisonic
Tivo
TMK
TNIX
Tocom
Tokai
Topline
Toshiba
Tosonic
Totevision
Touch
Toyoda
Tradex
20035, 20081, 20000, 20043,
21593, 21781
20240, 20000, 20002, 21593
21972
20162
21972
20209
20278
20000, 20104
20037, 20048, 20081, 20240,
20000
20048, 20081, 20045, 20000,
20067, 20043, 20209, 20041,
20348, 20352
20348
20348
20037, 20000, 20067, 20041,
20278, 20637, 20642, 21593
20035, 20162, 20037, 20081,
20000, 20226, 21162
20348
20352
20035, 20037, 20048, 20041,
20038
20037, 20209, 20348, 20642
20035, 20037, 20000
20041
20240
20209, 20041, 20278, 20320,
20642
20226
20037
20000, 20278
20037, 20000, 20278
20209, 20348, 20479, 20642
20278
20000, 20002
20060, 20067, 20041, 20278,
20320
20037, 20104, 20041, 20320
20278
20618, 20636, 20739, 21996
20240, 20000
20037
20240
20037, 20104, 20041
20348
20081, 20240, 20045, 20000,
20042, 20067, 20043, 20209,
20041, 20352, 20432, 20742,
20845, 21008, 21145, 21972,
21996
20278
20037, 20240
21972
20278
20081
U
Triad
Trix
Uher
Ultra
Ultravox
Unitech
United
Universum
V
W
X
Y
Z
Vector
Vector Research
Victor
Video Concepts
Video Technic
Videomagic
Videosonic
Viewsonic
Villain
Voodoo
Wards
Watson
Weltblick
Wharfedale
White
Westinghouse
World
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yoko
Zenith
ZT Group
ZX
20278
20037
20240
20045, 20278
20278
20240
20348, 20742, 21593
20037, 20081, 20240, 20000,
20104, 20209, 20106, 20348,
21137
20045
20184, 20038
20067, 20041
20045
20000
20037
20240, 20000
21972
20000
21972
20060, 20035, 20037, 20048,
20039, 20047, 20081, 20033,
20240, 20045, 20000, 20042,
20043, 20041, 20038, 20046,
20479
20081, 20352, 20642
20037
20642
20000, 20209, 20278, 20479,
20637
20209, 20002, 20348, 20479
20035, 20240, 20000
20041, 20038
20278
20037, 20240
20037, 20039, 20033, 20000,
20209, 20041, 20278, 20479,
20637, 21137, 21479
21972
20209, 20348, 20352
H
I
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
V
Z
Hughes Network
Systems
Philips
Samsung
20739
20739
20739
A
B
PVR
A
C
D
G
ABS
Alienware
CyberPower
Dell
DirecTV
Gateway
21972
21972
21972
21972
20739
21972
20614
21972
21972
21972
F
Ferguson
Fidelity
Firstline
Funai
20739
G
GE
20739
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
21972
20614, 20616
20618, 20739
20880
20614, 20616
20739
20614, 20616
20636, 21972
21972
21972
21972
20618, 20636, 20739
21008, 21972, 21996
21972
21972
21972
21972
TV/VCR Combination
DBS/PVR Combination
H
P
S
Go Video
Hewlett Packard
Howard Computers
HP
Hughes Network
Systems
Humax
Hush
iBUYPOWER
Linksys
Media Center PC
Microsoft
Mind
Niveus Media
Northgate
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
ReplayTV
Samsung
Sonic Blue
Sony
Stack 9
Systemax
Tagar Systems
Tivo
Toshiba
Touch
Viewsonic
Voodoo
ZT Group
C
D
E
Aiwa
Akai
Alba
America Action
Amstrad
Audiovox
Beko
Bestar
Blue Sky
BPL
Broksonic
Bush
Citizen
Curtis Mathes
Daewoo
Dantax
Emerson
20000, 20352, 20479, 20742,
21137
20352
20352
20278
20000
20278
20104
20278
20278, 20352, 20742
20046
20002, 20479, 21479
20352, 20742
20278, 21278
20035, 21035
20278, 20637, 21278
20352
20002, 20278, 20479, 20637,
21278, 21479
H
I
J
K
L
M
GoldStar
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
Hanimex
Harley Davidson
Hinari
Hitachi
Hypson
Internal
JBL
JMB
Kambrook
Kneissel
LG
Lloyd’s
Loewe
Magnasonic
Magnavox
Magnin
Matsui
Medion
Memorex
O
MGA
Mitsubishi
Optimus
Orion
P
Pace
Pacific
Palsonic
Panasonic
Penney
Q
R
Philips
Portland
Quasar
Radiola
RadioShack
RCA
S
Saba
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Saville
Schneider
20000, 20278
20000
20278
20000
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20807, 21035, 21060
20037, 20480, 21237
20278, 20352, 20637
20278, 20742
20081, 20347, 20352, 20742
20352
20000
20352
20000
20037
20278, 20637
20278
20352
20037
20278, 20352
20037, 20480, 21237
20000
20037
20278, 21278
20081, 20000, 21781
20240
20352, 20742
20352
20162, 20037, 21162, 21237,
21262
20240
20048, 20081, 20043, 20807
20162, 21162, 21262
20002, 20352, 20479, 20742,
21479
20352
20742
20000
20035, 20162, 21035, 21162,
21262
20035, 20037, 20240, 21035,
21237
20081
20637
20035, 20162, 21035, 21162
20081
20000
20060, 20035, 20048, 20240,
20807, 21035, 21060
20320
20240, 20432, 21014
20000, 20479, 21479
20240
20352
20081, 20000
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
33
12
2007/05/11
16:05:21
T
U
W
Z
Sears
SEG
Sharp
Shivaki
Siemens
Sinudyne
Sony
Supra
Sylvania
Symphonic
Tatung
Teac
Technics
Technosonic
Telefunken
Thomas
Thomson
Toshiba
United
White
Westinghouse
Zenith
20037, 20000, 21237
20637
20037, 20048, 20807
20037
20081
20352
20032, 20000, 21232
20348
20081, 21781
20000
20352
20037, 20000, 20637, 20642
20081
20352
20278
20000
20278
20352, 20432, 20845, 21145
20742
Sharp
Apex Digital
20278, 20637
20000, 20479, 20637, 21479
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
S
Amitech
Amoi
Amphion Media
Works
Amstrad
AMW
Anam
Ansonic
B
20807
DVD Player
1
A
3D LAB
4Kus
A-Trend
Acoustic Solutions
AEG
AFK
Aim
Airis
Aiwa
Akai
Akashi
AKI
Akira
Akura
Alba
Alco
Alize
All-Tel
Allegro
Altacom
13
30503, 30539
31158
30714
30713, 30730, 31228
30770, 30788, 30790, 31923
31051, 31152, 31923
30672, 30699, 30833
30672, 31005, 31224, 31250,
31321, 31345
30533, 30641
30690, 30695, 30705, 30770,
30788, 30790, 30884, 30898,
30899, 31115, 31205, 31233,
31695
30838
31005
30699, 31321
30898, 31051, 31140, 31233,
31367
30672, 30539, 30717, 30695,
30699, 30713, 30730, 30783,
30884, 31140, 31530, 31695
30790
31151
31451
30869
31224
C
Aristona
Arrgo
ASCOMTEC
Asono
Aspire Digital
Atacom
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Audioworld
Autovox
Auvio
Awa
Axion
Base
Basic Line
Baze
BBK
Beep
Bellagio
Belson
Binatone
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blu:sens
Blue Nova
International
Blue Parade
30784, 30770, 30850
30852
Campomatic Digital
Cat
CCE
Celestial
cello
Centrex
30872
30713, 30770, 31151, 31367
30872
31913
30759, 30774, 30831
30533, 30672, 30717, 30755,
30794, 30796, 30797, 30830,
31004, 31020, 31056, 31061
30539, 30646
31023
31923
31224
31168
31224
30690, 31923
30717, 30790
30790
30713
30843
30730, 30872
30730
31451
30713
30898
30862, 31224
31163
31004
31086, 31923
31923
30713, 30833, 30884
30717
31233, 31321
31321
30571
30672, 30651, 30695, 30699,
Blue Sky
30713, 30790, 30843, 31423
Boghe
31004
Boman
30783, 30898, 31005
Bose
32023
Brainwave
30770, 31115
Brandt
30503, 30651, 30551
Broksonic
30695
30672, 30717, 30690, 30699,
30713, 30723, 30730, 30831,
Bush
30833, 30884, 31051, 31140,
31483, 31695, 31832
Byd:sign
30872
C-Tech
30798, 31152
California Audio Labs 30490
Cambridge Audio
30751, 31109
Cambridge
30690
Soundworks
Centrum
CGV
Changhong
Cinea
Cinetec
cineULTRA
CineVision
Citizen
Clairtone
Classic
Clatronic
Clayton
Coby
Codex
Commax
Conia
Contel
Continental Edison
Craig
Creative
Crown
Crypto
Curtis Mathes
Cybercom
CyberHome
D
Cytron
D-Vision
Daenyx
Daewoo
Dalton
Dansai
Dantax
Daytek
Dayton
DCE
Decca
Denon
Denver
Denzel
Desay
Dgtec
Diamond
31051
30699, 30789, 31421, 31923
30730
31020
31730
30672, 31004
30713, 30789, 31005, 31227,
31923
30751, 31115
30627, 31061
30831, 30841
30713, 30872
30699
30833, 30869, 31483
30695
30571
30730, 31730
30672, 30675, 30788, 31233
30713
30730, 30852, 31086, 31321,
31923
31233
31321
30672, 30852, 31321
30788
30831, 30872
30831
30503, 30539
30690, 30713, 30770, 31115
31228
31087
30831
30714, 30816, 30874, 31023,
31024, 31117, 31129, 31502
30651, 30705, 30774, 31347
31115, 31367
30872
30490, 30784, 30705, 30714,
30770, 30833, 30869, 30872,
31172, 31483, 31906
31036
30770, 30783, 31115, 31695
30539, 30713, 30723, 30790
30872, 31005
30872
30831
30770, 31115
30490, 30634, 31634,
[32134]z
30672, 30699, 30788, 30898,
31056, 31104, 31321, 31923
30665
30843, 31212
30672
30651, 30751, 30768, 30790
Digihome
DigiLogic
digiRED
Digitech
Digitor
Digitrex
DiK
Dinamic
Disney
DiViDo
DK Digital
DMTech
Dragon
DreamX
DSE
Dual
E
Durabrand
DVD2000
DVX
E:max
EagleTec
eBench
ECC
Eclipse
Elfunk
Elin
Elite
Ellion
Elta
Eltax
Emerson
F
Enterprise
Entivo
Enzer
ESA
EuroLine
Fenner
Ferguson
Finlux
Firstline
G
Fisher
Funai
Fusion
Gateway
GE
General Electric
Germatic
30713
30713
30717
31832
30651, 30690, 30833, 31005,
31423
30672, 31004, 31056
30831
30788
30675, 30831, 31270
30705
30831
30783, 31271
30831
31151
30833, 31152, 31730
30651, 30665, 30675, 30713,
30730, 30783, 30790, 30831,
31023
30713, 30831, 31023, 31502
30521
30768
31233, 31321
30714
31152
30730
30723, 30751
30713, 30850, 30884
30770
31152
30850, 31421
30672, 30690, 30770, 30788,
30850, 31051, 31115, 31151,
31233
31233, 31321
30591, 30675, 30705, 30821,
31268
30591
30503, 30539
30784, 30770, 31228
30821, 31268
30675, 30788, 31115, 31233
30651
30651, 30695, 30713, 30884,
30898, 31695, 31730
30672, 30591, 30741, 30751,
30770, 30783
30651, 30713, 30843, 30869,
31530
30670
30675, 30695, 31268
30862
31158
30522, 30815, 30717
30717
31051
Global Link
Global Solutions
Global Sphere
H
I
J
31224
30768
31152
30573, 30744, 30717, 30715,
30741, 30783, 30833, 30869,
Go Video
31044, 31075, 31099, 31158,
31483, 31730
GoldStar
30591, 30741, 30869
30651, 30690, 30713, 30723,
30730, 30783, 30790, 30833,
Goodmans
31004, 31140, 31423, 31530,
31730, 31923
GP Audio
31140
GPX
30699, 30741
Gradiente
30490, 30651
Graetz
30665
Gran Prix
30831, 30898
Grandin
30713, 31233
Greenhill
30717
30539, 30651, 30551, 30670,
30686, 30695, 30705, 30713,
Grundig
30775, 30790, 31004, 31036,
31695, 31730, 31832, 31920
Grunkel
30770, 30790, 30831
30713, 30841, 30850, 31233,
H&B
31421
Haaz
30751, 31152
Haier
30843
Hanseatic
30741, 30783, 30790
Harman/Kardon
30582, 30702
HCM
30788
HDT
30705
HE
30730, 31163, 31923
Henss
30713
HiMAX
30843
30573, 30664, 30665, 30713,
Hitachi
31247, 31920
Hiteker
30672, 31923
30651, 30713, 30831, 31004,
Hoeher
31224
Home Electronics
30730, 30770
Home Tech Industries 31224
Hoyo
30665
Humax
30646
Hyundai
30783, 30850, 31061, 31228
iLo
31348
Ingelen
30788
Ingersol
31023
Initial
30839, 30717
Inno Hit
30713
Insignia
31268
Integra
30571, 30627, 31634
Irradio
30869, 31115, 31224, 31233
IRT
30783
ISP
30695
Jamo
31036
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
34
2007/05/11
16:05:22
Jaton
JBL
JDB
JDV
Jeken
Jepssen
JMB
JNC
JSI
K
L
M
30665
30702
30730
31367
30699
31250
30695
30672, 31271
31423
30503, 30539, 30558, 30623,
JVC
30867, 31164, 31597, 31860
jWin
31051
Kansas Technologies 31233, 31530
Karcher
30783
Kawasaki
30790
Kendo
30672, 30699, 30713, 30831
Kennex
30713, 30770, 30898
Kenwood
30490, 30534
Kiiro
30770
Kiss
30665, 30841, 31523
KLH
30815, 30717, 30790, 31020
Kloss
30533
Koda
31230
Konka
31192
Koss
30651, 31061, 31423
Kreisen
31421
KXD
31321, 31923
Lasonic
30627, 30798, 30789
Lawson
30768
Lecson
31533
Leiker
30872
30651, 30699, 30713, 30770,
Lenco
30774
Lenoir
31228
Lenoxx
30690, 30838
Lexia
30699, 30768
30591, 30741, 30790, 30869,
LG
31906
Lifetec
30651, 30831, 31347
Limit
30768, 31104
LiteOn
31058, 31158
Lodos
30713
Loewe
30539, 30511, 30741, 30885
Logik
30713, 30884
Logix
30705, 30783
Luker
31367
30695, 30705, 30713, 30741,
Lumatron
30833, 31115, 31321, 31832
Lunatron
30741
Luxman
30573
Luxor
30713, 31004, 31695, 31730
Magnasonic
30651, 30675
Magnat
31923
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
Marquant
Matsui
Maxdorf
Maxent
Maxim
Maya
MBO
McIntosh
MDS
Mecotek
Medion
N
MEI
Memorex
Metronic
Metz
MiCO
Micromaxx
Micromedia
Micromega
Microsoft
Microstar
Minato
Minax
Minerva
Minoka
Mintek
Mirror
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
MPX
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
NAD
Naiko
Narita
NEC
Neovia
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
NexxTech
30503, 30539, 30646, 30675,
30713, 30821, 30885, 31140,
31268
30723
31345
30705, 30713
30503, 30539, 30675
30713
30770
30672, 30651, 30695, 30713,
30884, 31004, 31695, 31730
30788
31347
30713, 30872, 31367
31345
30690, 30730, 31730
31533
30713
30770
30651, 30630, 30774, 30783,
30831, 31006, 31270, 31345,
31347, 31423
30790
30690, 30695, 30831, 31270
30690
30525, 30571, 30713
30723, 30751, 31223
31695
30503, 30539
30539, 31005
30522, 31708
30831
30752
30713
30705
30770, 31115
30839, 30717
30752
31521, 30521, 30713, 31403
30770, 31451
30665
30843
30730, 31730
30651, 30751, 31223
30831
30741
30770, 31004, 31367
31367
30741, 30869, 31404
31271
30717
30665
30770, 30831, 31197
31402
O
Nikkai
Nintaus
Niro
Norcent
Nordmende
Noriko
Nova
Nowa
Nu-Tec
Okano
Olidata
Omni
P
Onix
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
Optim
Optimus
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
Ormond
P&B
Pacific
Packard Bell
Palladium
Palsonic
Panasonic
Panda
peeKTon
Philco
Philips
Philo
Phonotrend
PianoDisc
Pioneer
Plu2
Pointer
Polaroid
Polk Audio
Portland
Powerpoint
Presidian
Prima
Prinz
Prism
Pro2
ProCaster
31923
31051, 31202
32024
30872, 31923
30774, 30831
30752
31923
30843
31228
30752
30672
30690, 30833, 30838, 30862,
31104, 31832
30838
30503, 30627
31158
31224
30843
30525, 30571
30872
30695, 31233, 31695
30651
30713
31451
30695, 30713, 30759, 30768,
30790, 30831
30831
30695, 30713, 31906, 31920
30672, 30852, 31056, 31321
30503, 30490, 30571, 30703,
31362, 31462, 31490, 31579,
31762, 31834, 31905, 31908
30717, 30789, 31203
30898, 31224
30690, 30862
30503, 30539, 30646, 30675,
30854, 30885, 31158, 31260,
31267, 31340, 31354
31345
30699
31024
30490, 30525, 30571, 30631,
31965
30850
30784
31020, 31061, 31086
30539
30770
30872, 31005
30675
31228
30831
30705, 30831
31345
31004
Proceed
Proline
Proscan
Proson
Prosonic
ProVision
Q
R
Pye
QONIX
Qwestar
Radionette
RadioShack
Raite
RCA
Realistic
REC
Redstar
Relisys
Reoc
Revoy
Rex
Richmond
Rio
Roadstar
S
Rocksonic
Ronin
Rotel
Rowa
Rownsonic
Saba
Sabaki
Saivod
Salora
Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Scan
ScanMagic
ScanSonic
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Schwaiger
Scientific Labs
30672
30672, 30651, 30686, 30833,
31004, 31483
30522
30713
30699, 30752
30699, 30730, 31163, 31321,
31923
30539, 30646
31051
30651
30741, 30869, 31906, 32024
30571
30665
30522, 30571, 30717, 30790,
30822, 31022, 31132, 31769,
31913, 31965
30571
30490
30759, 30763, 30770, 30788,
30898, 31345, 31923
31347
30752, 30768
30699, 30841
30838
31233
30869
30672, 30690, 30699, 30713,
30730, 30833, 30898, 31051,
31227
30789
30872
30558, 30623
30717, 30759, 30872, 31004
30789
30651, 3055
30798
30759, 30831, 31367
30741
30752, 31321, 31347
30490, 30573, 30744, 30199,
30820, 30899, 31044, 31075,
31635, 31932
30784, 30695, 30751, 30763,
30768, 31051, 31228, 31230,
31695, 31832
30670, 30675, 30695, 30713,
30873, 31228
30705, 30850
30730, 31730
31695
30770, 30788, 31115, 31151
30539, 30646, 30651, 30705,
30713, 30774, 30783, 30788,
30790, 30831, 30869, 31367
30752
30768
Scott
Seeltech
SEG
Sensory Science
Shanghai
Sharp
Sharper Image
Sherwood
Shinco
Shinsonic
Siemssen
Sigmatek
Siltex
Silva
Silva Schneider
SilverCrest
Simaudio
Singer
Sistemas
Skantic
Skymaster
Skyworth
Sliding
Slim Art
SM Electronic
Smart
Sonai
Sonashi
Sonic Blue
Sony
Sound Color
Soundmaster
Soundmax
Soundwave
Spectra
Standard
Star Clusters
Starlogic
Starmedia
Stevison
Strong
Sunkai
Sunstech
Sunwood
Superscan
Supervision
SVA
30672, 30651, 31005, 31036,
31233, 31423
31224, 31451
30798, 30665, 30713, 30763,
30872, 30884, 31483, 31530
31158
30672
30630, 30675, 30713, 30752,
31256, 32015, 32024
31117
30717, 30741, 30770
30717
30533, 30839
31382
31005, 31224
31224
30788, 30898
30831, 30898
31152
30885
30690, 30751, 30768
30672
30539, 30713
30730, 30768
30898
31115
30784
30690, 30730, 30768, 31152
30705, 30713
30755
30831
30573, 30715, 30783, 30869,
31099
30533, 31533, 30864, 30573,
30630, 30772, 31033, 31070,
31431, 31433, 31536, 31633,
31769, 31981, 32043
31233
30768
30768
30783
30872
30651, 30768, 30788, 30831,
30898
31152, 31227
31005
31005, 31224
31367
30713
30770, 30850
30831
30788, 30898
30821
30768, 31152
30672, 30717, 30752, 31105
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
35
14
2007/05/11
16:05:23
T
Sylvania
Symphonic
Synn
Tandberg
Tangent
Targa
Tatung
Tchibo
TCL
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technica
Technics
Technika
Technisson
Technosonic
Techwood
Tedelex
Telefunken
Teletech
Tensai
Tevion
Theta Digital
Thomson
Tivo
Tokai
Tom-Tec
Top Suxess
Toshiba
U
TRANS-continents
Transonic
Tredex
TruVision
Tsinghua Tongfang
TSM
Umax
Unimax
United
Universum
V
15
Uptek
upXus
Urban Concepts
US Logic
Venturer
30630, 30675, 30821, 31268
30675, 30821, 31268
30768
30713, 31695
31321
31227
30770, 31695
30741
31180
30741, 30790
30571, 30717, 30675, 30741,
30759, 30768, 30790, 30833,
31006, 31197, 31227
30898
31367, 31695
30490, 30703, 31905
30770, 30831, 31115, 31695
31115
30730, 31051, 31115
30713, 31530
30690, 30768, 31004, 31228
30789, 30790, 30833, 31483,
31832, 31923
30713, 30768
30651, 30690, 30770
30651, 30798, 30768, 30833,
30898, 31036, 31227, 31347,
31382, 31483, 31730, 31923
30571
30522, 30511, 30551
31503
30784, 30665, 30788, 30790,
30898
30789
31224
30503, 30573, 30539, 30695,
31045, 31154, 31503, 31510,
31769
30831, 30872, 31321, 31327
30730
30843
31451
31205
31224
30690, 31151
30770
30675, 30695, 30699, 30713,
30730, 30788, 30884, 31115,
31152, 31228, 31367, 31832
30591, 30713, 30741, 30790,
30869, 31227, 31530, 31913
30763
31345
30503, 30539
30839
30790
W
Vestel
Victor
Vieta
Viewmaster
Voxson
Vtrek
Waitec
Walkvision
Waltham
Welkin
Wellington
Weltstar
Wesder
Wharfedale
X
Y
Wilson
Windsor
Windy Sam
WIZE
Woxter
Xbox
Xenius
XLogic
XMS
Xoro
Yakumo
Yamada
Yamaha
Yamakawa
Yukai
Z
Zenith
Zeus
30713, 30884, 31530
31597
30705
30862, 31224
30690, 30730, 30774, 30831
31228
31151, 31224, 31233
30717
31530
30831
30713
30713
30699
30686, 30751, 30752, 30790,
31832
30831, 31233
30713
30573
31115
31005, 31151, 31224
30522, 31708
30790
30768, 31152, 31228
30770, 30788
31183, 31250
31004, 31056
30872, 31004, 31056, 31151,
31158
30490, 30539, 30646, 30545,
31354
30665, 30872, 31104
30730, 31730
30503, 30591, 30741, 30869,
31906
30784
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
DVD Recorder
1
A
B
C
4Kus
Airis
Akira
Alba
Apex Digital
Aristona
Aspire Digital
Belson
Cat
cello
Centrum
Classic
Coby
Commax
Conia
CyberHome
31158
31321
31321
31530
31056
30646
31168
31086
31421
31730
31227
31730
31086
31321
31321
31129, 31502
N
O
P
R
Cytron
Denon
Denver
Digitrex
DSE
Durabrand
E:max
Ellion
Eltax
Emerson
Ferguson
Firstline
Funai
Gateway
Go Video
Goodmans
GPX
Grundig
H&B
Humax
iLo
JVC
Kansas Technologies
Kreisen
KXD
LG
Lifetec
LiteOn
Loewe
Lumatron
Luxor
Magnavox
Matsui
Maxent
MBO
Medion
MiCO
Mitsubishi
Mustek
NEC
Oopla
Palsonic
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polaroid
ProVision
Pye
RCA
Relisys
Roadstar
31347
30490
31056
31056
31730
31502
31321
31421
31321
30675
31730
31530
30675
31158
30741, 31158, 31730
31530, 31730
30741
31730
31421
30646
31348
31164, 31597
31530
31421
31321
30741
31347
31158
30741
31321
31730
30646, 30675
31730
31347
31730
31347
30751
31403
31730
31404
31158
31056, 31321
30490, 31579
30646, 31158
30631
31086
31321
30646
30522
31347
31227
S
Sampo
Samsung
ScanMagic
Schneider
SEG
Sensory Science
Sharp
Sony
T
U
V
W
Y
Z
Star Clusters
Sylvania
Tangent
Targa
Teac
Techwood
Tevion
Thomson
Toshiba
Universum
Vestel
Victor
Waltham
Yakumo
Yamada
Yamaha
Yukai
Zenith
31347
30490, 31635
31730
30646
31530
31158
30630, 30675
31033, 31070, 31431, 31433,
31536
31227
30675
31321
31227
31227
31530
31227, 31347, 31730
30551
31510
31227, 31530
31530
31597
31530
31056
31056, 31158
30646
31730
30741
TV/DVD Combination
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Akai
Akura
Alba
Amstrad
Apex Digital
Black Diamond
Broksonic
Bush
Centrum
Citizen
Crown
D-Vision
DMTech
Elfunk
Emerson
ESA
Ferguson
Funai
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
Hitachi
30695
31367
30695, 30884
31367
30830
30713, 30884
30695
30713, 30884
30713
30695
30713
31367
31271
30713, 30884
30675, 31268
31268
30695, 30713, 30884
31268
30713
30713
30539, 30695
31247
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
R
S
T
U
V
Insignia
JDV
JNC
Konka
Logik
Luker
Luxor
Magnavox
Matsui
Maxim
Naiko
Narita
Neovia
Orion
Pacific
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
Saivod
Samsung
Sansui
Schneider
SEG
Sliding
Stevison
Sylvania
Technica
Thomson
Toshiba
United
Universum
Vestel
31268
31367
31271
31192
30713, 30884
31367
30713
31268
30713, 30884
31367
31367
31367
31271
30695
30695
31490
30539, 30854, 31260
31022
31367
30899
30695
31367
30713, 30884
31115
31367
30630, 30675, 31268
31367
30551
30695
30713, 30884, 31367
30713
30884
TV/VCR Combination
T
Thomson
30551
TV/VCR/DVD Combination
A
E
M
P
R
S
T
Akai
Emerson
ESA
Magnavox
Panasonic
RCA
Sharp
Superscan
Sylvania
Symphonic
Toshiba
30899
30821
30821
30821
31362, 31462
31132
30630
30821
30821
30821
31045
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
36
2007/05/11
16:05:25
DVD preset codes / Codes préréglés DVD
DENON Model No. / Modéle numéro
32134 (default / défaut)
DVD-555
DVD-755
DVD-900
DVD-910
DVD-955
DVD-1000
DVD-1200
DVD-1500
DVD-1710
DVD-1910
DVD-1930CI
DVD-2200
DVD-2800
DVD-2800g
DVD-2900
DVD-2910
DVD-2930CI
DVD-3800
DVD-3910
DVD-3930CI
DVD-5900
DVD-5910
DVD-9000
DVM-715
DVM-1800
DVM-1805
DVM-1815
DVM-2815
DVM-4800
30490
DVD-800
DVD-1600
DVD-2000
DVD-2500
DVD-3000
DVD-3300
[ ]z: Preset codes set upon shipment
from the factory.
[ ]z: Les codes préréglés différent en
fonctiom des livraison de l’usine.
PRESET CODE
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
37
16
2007/05/11
16:05:25
TOKYO, JAPAN
www.denon.com
4.AVR4308_P70~Last.indd
38
Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc.
Printed in Japan 00D 511 4609 004
2007/05/11
16:05:25